[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025232279A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus

Info

Publication number
WO2025232279A1
WO2025232279A1 PCT/CN2025/071993 CN2025071993W WO2025232279A1 WO 2025232279 A1 WO2025232279 A1 WO 2025232279A1 CN 2025071993 W CN2025071993 W CN 2025071993W WO 2025232279 A1 WO2025232279 A1 WO 2025232279A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
information
abnormal event
cells
measurement
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2025/071993
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
李翔宇
陈君
彭文杰
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025232279A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025232279A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly to a communication method and apparatus.
  • Cell handover (or handover) of terminal devices is controlled by access network equipment.
  • a terminal device accesses cell 1 of the access network equipment.
  • the access network equipment sends a measurement configuration to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device measures the downlink reference signals of multiple cells according to the measurement configuration to obtain measurement results for multiple cells, and sends these measurement results back to the access network equipment.
  • the access network equipment can select cell 2 with better signal quality from among the multiple cells, and then send a handover command message to the terminal device.
  • the handover command message instructs the terminal device to hand over from cell 1 to cell 2.
  • the terminal device hands over from cell 1 to cell 2.
  • RLF radio link failure
  • This application provides a communication method and apparatus for improving the stability of terminal device communication during the handover process.
  • this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a first communication device, which may be a terminal device or a module within the terminal device, such as a chip. Further, when the first communication device is a module within the terminal device, the module can send information (e.g., a measurement report) to other modules within the terminal device (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement report being sent by the terminal device to an access network device; of course, the module can also receive information (e.g., a measurement configuration) from other modules (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement configuration being sent by the access network device to the terminal device.
  • a measurement report e.g., a measurement report
  • other modules within the terminal device e.g., an RF module or an antenna
  • the module can also receive information (e.g., a measurement configuration) from other modules (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement configuration being sent by the access network device to the terminal device.
  • the following explanation
  • the method includes: a terminal device acquiring first information, which is prediction information (or inference information) used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future; the terminal device accessing the first cell before a first time when it determines that a preset condition is met based on the first information, where the first time is the predicted occurrence time of the first abnormal event; wherein, the first cell is different from the serving cell.
  • first information which is prediction information (or inference information) used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future
  • the terminal device accessing the first cell before a first time when it determines that a preset condition is met based on the first information, where the first time is the predicted occurrence time of the first abnormal event; wherein, the first cell is different from the serving cell.
  • the terminal device obtains prediction information about the first abnormal event that will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future, and connects to the first cell in advance based on this prediction information. This avoids the terminal device failing to connect to the first cell before receiving the handover command message (or conditional handover (CHO) configuration information) before the RLF occurs between the terminal device and the serving cell. This helps improve the stability of terminal device communication.
  • the handover command message or conditional handover (CHO) configuration information
  • the terminal device when the terminal device accesses the first cell, it may specifically send a measurement report to the first access network device, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, of which the first cell is included, and the first access network device is associated with the serving cell; the terminal device receives configuration information of the first cell from the first access network device; and the terminal device switches to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell.
  • the terminal device can trigger the first access network device to send configuration information of the first cell to the terminal device by sending a measurement report to the first access network device.
  • the terminal device can switch to the first cell before an RLF occurs with the serving cell.
  • the measurement report also includes prediction information of second abnormal events occurring when multiple second cells are used as target cells for terminal equipment handover.
  • the second abnormal event (or type of second abnormal event) includes one or more of the following: handover failure, RLF, ping-pong handover, unnecessary handover, handover too late, or handover too early.
  • the first access network device when the first access network device selects a target cell/candidate cell for the terminal device, it considers the prediction information of a second abnormal event that might occur when the second cell is used as the target cell for handover of the terminal device. This helps to ensure the stability of terminal device communication.
  • the measurement report also includes initial information.
  • the first access network device can determine the reason why the terminal device sends the measurement report based on the first information in the measurement report, and then quickly select a suitable target cell/candidate cell for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device when it accesses the first cell, it may specifically send second information to the second access network device.
  • the second information indicates access to the first cell (or, the second information indicates access to the first cell via RRC re-establishment).
  • the first cell is determined by measuring the signals of multiple third cells, including the first cell.
  • the second access network device is associated with the first cell.
  • the second information may be, for example, an RRC re-establishment request message.
  • the terminal device can select the first cell and initiate an RRC re-establishment process to the second access network device associated with the first cell.
  • the terminal device can access the first cell before an RLF occurs with the serving cell.
  • the terminal device before accessing the first cell, the terminal device also receives third information (e.g., CHO configuration information) from the first access network device.
  • This third information indicates the configuration information of multiple fourth cells, and the first access network device is associated with the serving cell.
  • the terminal device may determine the first cell from among the multiple fourth cells by measuring the signals from the multiple fourth cells; and then switch to the first cell based on its configuration information.
  • the terminal device can automatically execute the CHO handover process and select the first cell from multiple fourth cells.
  • the terminal device can access the first cell before an RLF occurs with the serving cell.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device determines that a preset condition is met based on the first information, it can specifically determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur in the future. Alternatively, it can determine that the preset condition is met when the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than a first threshold. Or, it can determine that the preset condition is met when the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than the first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • the first exception event includes RLF.
  • RLF includes one or more of the following: RLF caused by physical layer problem causing timer timeout, RLF caused by timer timeout triggered when radio problem timer runs and triggers measurement reporting, RLF caused by random access procedure failure, RLF caused by radio link control failure, RLF caused by detection of continuous uplink READ failure, or RLF caused by receiving backhaul radio link failure from parent node.
  • the terminal device when it acquires the first information, it may specifically receive fourth information from the first access network device, the fourth information indicating at least one measurement item.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signal of the serving cell to obtain measurement results corresponding to each of the at least one measurement item; the terminal device determines the first information based on the measurement results corresponding to each of the at least one measurement item.
  • the at least one measurement item includes at least one of: a measurement identifier, a measurement object, a report configuration, or a measurement event.
  • the terminal device can determine at least one measurement item that needs to be measured based on the fourth information, and then determine the first information based on the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item, which helps to improve the accuracy of the terminal device in determining the first information.
  • this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a second communication device.
  • the second communication device can be an access network device or a module within the access network device, such as a chip.
  • the module can send information (e.g., measurement configuration) to other modules within the access network device (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement configuration being sent by the access network device to a terminal device; of course, the module can also receive information (e.g., a measurement report) from other modules (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement report being sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • information e.g., measurement configuration
  • other modules e.g., an RF module or an antenna
  • the module can also receive information (e.g., a measurement report) from other modules (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement report being sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the following explanation uses an access network device as an example.
  • the method includes: an access network device (or a first access network device) receiving a measurement report, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, the measurement report being sent by a terminal device when it determines that a prediction condition is met based on first information, the first information being prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future, the access network device being associated with the serving cell; the access network device sending configuration information of the first cell or configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells, the first cell being one of multiple second cells, the configuration information of the first cell or the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being determined based on the measurement report; the configuration information of the first cell being used by the terminal device to access the first cell, and the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being used by the terminal device to select from one or more candidate cells and access the first cell.
  • the access network device when it sends the configuration information of the first cell, it may specifically send fifth information.
  • This fifth information includes the configuration information of the first cell and is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first cell based on that configuration information.
  • the fifth information could be, for example, a handover command message, equivalent to an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the ⁇ reconfigurationWithSync ⁇ field.
  • the access network device when the access network device sends configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells, specifically, the access network device sends sixth information.
  • This sixth information includes configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells.
  • the sixth information instructs the terminal device to select a first cell from the one or more candidate cells based on the configuration information corresponding to each candidate cell, and then switch to the first cell.
  • the sixth information could be, for example, CHO configuration information, which is carried in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the measurement report also includes prediction information of second abnormal events occurring when multiple second cells are used as target cells for terminal equipment handover.
  • the second abnormal event includes one or more of the following: handover failure, RLF, ping-pong handover, unnecessary handover, handover too late, or handover too early.
  • the measurement report also includes initial information.
  • the first exception event includes RLF.
  • RLF includes one or more of the following: RLF caused by physical layer problem causing timer timeout, RLF caused by timer timeout triggered when radio problem timer runs and triggers measurement reporting, RLF caused by random access procedure failure, RLF caused by radio link control failure, RLF caused by detection of continuous uplink READ failure, or RLF caused by receiving backhaul radio link failure from parent node.
  • embodiments of this application provide a communication device that has the function of implementing the terminal device in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • the device can be a terminal device or a chip included in the terminal device.
  • the communication device may also have the function of an access network device in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect described above.
  • the device may be an access network device or a chip included in the access network device.
  • the functions of the aforementioned communication device can be implemented by hardware or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules, units, or means corresponding to the aforementioned functions.
  • the device includes a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module is configured to support the device in performing the functions of a terminal device as described in the first aspect or any implementation thereof, or in performing the functions of an access network device as described in the second aspect or any implementation thereof.
  • the transceiver module supports communication between the device and other communication devices; for example, when the device is a terminal device, it can receive measurement configurations from the access network device.
  • the communication device may also include a storage module coupled to the processing module, which stores necessary program instructions and data for the device.
  • the processing module may be a processor
  • the communication module may be a transceiver
  • the storage module may be a memory.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor or separated from it.
  • the device includes a processor and may also include a memory.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute computer program instructions stored in the memory to cause the device to perform the methods in the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, or to perform the methods in the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.
  • the device also includes a communication interface, with the processor coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface; when the device is a chip included in an access network device or a chip included in a terminal device, the communication interface may be the chip's input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, and the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • embodiments of this application provide a chip system, including: a processor and a memory, the processor being coupled to the memory, the memory being used to store programs or instructions, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor, causing the chip system to implement the methods in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or to implement the methods in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the chip system also includes an interface circuit for exchanging code instructions with the processor.
  • the chip system may include one or more processors, which can be implemented in hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented in hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.
  • the processor When implemented in software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor that reads software code stored in memory.
  • the chip system may contain one or more memories. These memories may be integrated with the processor or disposed separately.
  • the memory may be a non-transitory processor, such as read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated with the processor on the same chip or disposed on separate chips.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • this application provides a computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program or instructions that, when executed by a communication device, cause the communication device to perform the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, or cause the communication device to perform the method of the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.
  • this application provides a computer program product comprising a computer program or instructions that, when executed by a communication device, implement the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, or implement the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.
  • embodiments of this application provide a communication system including an access network device and at least one terminal device.
  • the terminal device is used to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof
  • the access network device is used to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.
  • Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture
  • Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the functions of a CU and a DU;
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an application architecture for an AI model
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a traditional switching process
  • Figure 4 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method exemplarily provided in this application.
  • Figure 5 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a first specific scenario
  • Figure 6 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a second specific scenario
  • Figure 7 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a third specific scenario
  • Figure 8 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a fourth specific scenario
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction between modules within a first base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction between modules within a second base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application;
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by example in this application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided by example in this application.
  • Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system.
  • the communication system includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200.
  • the communication system may also include an Internet 300.
  • the wireless access network 100 may include at least one wireless access network device (110a and 110b in Figure 1A) and at least one terminal device (120a-120j in Figure 1A).
  • the terminal devices are connected wirelessly to the wireless access network devices, and the wireless access network devices are connected to the core network wirelessly or via a wired connection.
  • the core network devices and the wireless access network devices may be independent physical devices, or the functions of the core network devices and the logical functions of the wireless access network devices may be integrated into the same physical device, or a single physical device may integrate some of the functions of the core network devices and some of the functions of the wireless access network devices.
  • Terminal devices and wireless access network devices can be interconnected via wired or wireless connections.
  • Figure 1A is only a schematic diagram; this communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in Figure 1A.
  • Wireless access network equipment can be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next-generation NodeB (gNB) in a 5G mobile communication system, a next-generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, or an access node in a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) system, etc.
  • Wireless access network equipment can be a macro base station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110a), a micro base station or an indoor station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110b), or a relay node or donor node, etc.
  • the UART devices can be a central unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU).
  • the CU and DU can be separate entities or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU).
  • BBU baseband unit
  • the RU can be included in radio frequency (RF) devices or RF units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
  • the CU and DU are connected via an F1 interface; the DU and RU are connected via a fronthaul interface.
  • CU or CU-CP and CU-UP
  • DU or RU
  • RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning.
  • O-RAN open radio access network
  • CU can also be called O-CU (open CU)
  • DU can also be called O-DU
  • CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP
  • CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP
  • RU can also be called O-RU.
  • Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software modules and hardware modules.
  • Figure 1B illustrates the functions of a CU and DU.
  • the CU implements the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer, the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer, the Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer, and other control functions.
  • the DU implements the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, the Media Access Control (MAC) layer, and higher layers of the Physical Layer (PHY) (closest to the MAC layer).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • PHY Physical Layer
  • Higher-layer functions of the Physical Layer include one or more of the following: feedforward error correction coding/decoding, scrambling/descrambling, or modulation/demodulation.
  • Terminal devices can also be called terminals, user equipment (UE), mobile stations, mobile terminal devices, etc. They can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), the Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grids, smart furniture, smart offices, smart wearables, smart transportation, and smart cities.
  • Terminal devices can include mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, and smart home devices.
  • Access network equipment and terminal equipment can be fixed or mobile. They can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; and they can be deployed in the air on aircraft, balloons, and satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of the access network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the helicopter or drone 120i in Figure 1A can be configured as a mobile access network device.
  • terminal device 120i For terminal devices 120j that access the wireless access network 100 via 120i, terminal device 120i is an access network device; however, for access network device 110a, 120i is a terminal device. That is, 110a and 120i communicate via a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, 110a and 120i can also communicate via an interface protocol between access network devices. In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also an access network device. Therefore, both access network devices and terminal devices can be collectively referred to as communication devices.
  • 110a and 110b in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with access network device functions
  • 120a-120j in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with terminal device functions.
  • Communication between access network devices and terminal devices, between access network devices, and between terminal devices can be conducted using licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, or both simultaneously. Communication can be conducted using spectrum below 6 GHz, spectrum above 6 GHz, or both simultaneously.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
  • the functions of the access network device can be executed by modules (such as chips) within the access network device, or by a control subsystem that includes the functions of the access network device.
  • This control subsystem including the functions of the access network device, can be a control center in the aforementioned application scenarios such as smart grids, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart cities.
  • the functions of the terminal device can be executed by modules (such as chips or modems) within the terminal device, or by a device that includes the functions of the terminal device.
  • the access network device sends downlink signals or downlink information to the terminal device, with the downlink information carried on the downlink channel; the terminal device sends uplink signals or uplink information to the access network device, with the uplink information carried on the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device needs to establish a radio connection with the cell controlled by the access network device.
  • the cell with which the terminal device has established a radio connection is called the serving cell of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device communicates with this serving cell, it is also subject to interference from signals from neighboring cells.
  • the following description uses the base station as an example of a wireless access network device and the UE as an example of a terminal device.
  • the model is, for example, an artificial intelligence (AI) model or a machine learning (ML) model.
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • ML machine learning
  • Figure 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of an AI model application architecture.
  • the data source stores training and inference data.
  • the AI model training host analyzes or trains the AI model using the training data provided by the data source and deploys the AI model on the AI model inference host.
  • the AI model training host can also update the AI model already deployed on the AI model inference host.
  • the AI model inference host can also feed back relevant information about the deployed AI model to the AI model training host, enabling the training host to optimize or update the deployed AI model.
  • the AI model is learned through the AI model training nodes, which essentially learn the mapping relationship between the AI model's input and output using training data.
  • the AI model inference nodes use the AI model to perform inference based on the inference data provided by the data source, and obtain the inference result. This method can also be described as follows: the AI model inference nodes input the inference data into the AI model, and the AI model outputs the inference result.
  • the inference result can indicate the configuration parameters used (executed) by the executing object, and/or the operations performed by the executing object.
  • the inference result can be uniformly planned by the actor entity and sent to one or more executing objects (e.g., network entities) for execution.
  • the executing entity or executing object can feed back the parameters or measurements it collects to the data source; this process can be called performance feedback, and the fed-back parameters can serve as training data or inference data.
  • the executing entity or executing object can also determine AI model performance-related feedback information based on the inference result output by the AI model inference node, and feed this feedback information back to the AI model inference node.
  • the AI model inference node can then use this feedback information to feed back the AI model's performance information to the AI model training node, enabling the AI model training node to optimize or update the deployed AI model; this process can be called AI model feedback.
  • Connectivity-state measurements are generally used for cell selection during the handover preparation process.
  • the UE After the base station sends the measurement configuration to the UE, the UE detects changes in the signal status of neighboring cells based on the measurement objects and reporting configuration parameters indicated in the measurement configuration.
  • the measurement configuration is generally transmitted via RRC reconfiguration messages.
  • the UE performs relevant measurements according to the content of the measurement configuration and sends the measurement results to the base station through a measurement report.
  • the measurement configuration includes the measurement object, report configuration, measurement identities, measurement quantity configuration, and measurement interval configuration.
  • the measurement identity can be associated with both the measurement object and the report configuration.
  • the measurement objects include the subcarrier spacing of the synchronization signal block (SSB), the SSB-based measurement timing configuration (SMTC), whitelisted cells, and blacklisted cells.
  • Whitelisted cells can also be called allowed cells; blacklisted cells can also be called excluded cells.
  • the network can configure specific lists of cells to be measured, namely blacklisted cell lists and whitelisted cell lists. For cells on the blacklist, the UE will no longer perform event measurements or report measurements. Whitelisted cells are those on the measurement frequency that the UE will perform event measurements and report measurements on.
  • the report configuration specifies the criteria and format that trigger the UE to report measurement reports.
  • the measurement report is based on measurements of signals such as SSB or Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • Each reporting configuration has a unique identifier (which may be referred to as the report configuration identifier).
  • Event-triggered reporting configuration includes various measurement events (as shown in Table 1) and threshold values. Under normal circumstances, the UE needs to continuously meet the entry conditions for measurement reporting within a defined hysteresis time (TimeToTrigger) before triggering a measurement report.
  • Periodic-triggered reporting configuration includes the reporting period, etc.
  • Ms and Mn represent the measurement results of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, respectively;
  • Hys indicates amplitude hysteresis in the measurement result
  • TimeToTrigger represents the duration for which the event entry condition is continuously met, i.e., time delay
  • Thresh, Thresh1, and Thresh2 represent threshold values
  • Ofs and Ofn represent the frequency offset of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, respectively.
  • Ocs and Ocn represent the cell individual offset (CIO) of the serving cell and neighboring cell, respectively.
  • Signal quality can be represented by one or more of the following four parameters:
  • RSRP Reference signal received power
  • Received signal strength indication (RSSI) is used to reflect the total signal strength of the current channel.
  • Reference signal received quality is used to reflect the signal-to-noise ratio and interference level of the current channel quality, and is approximately the ratio of RSRP to RSSI.
  • SINR Signal to interference and noise ratio
  • the measurement results in the above event are the corresponding measured triggering results.
  • Measurement identifiers are used to associate measurement objects with measurement configurations. If a UE reaches a measurement activation threshold, it determines whether to perform the measurement based on the presence or absence of a measurement identifier. When a UE sends a measurement report to the base station, it only needs to indicate the measurement identifier. The base station can then use the measurement identifier to find the corresponding measurement object identifier and report configuration identifier, and thus determine what event the measurement report refers to. The base station can configure multiple measurement identifiers to link multiple measurement objects to the same report configuration, or multiple report configurations to the same measurement object.
  • Handover also known as cell handover refers to the migration of the radio link connection of a UE from a source cell to a target cell. Handover includes traditional handover and conditional handover (CHO), which are explained below:
  • the base station used to manage the source cell is referred to as the source base station
  • the base station used to manage the target cell is referred to as the target base station
  • the base station used to manage the candidate cell is referred to as the candidate base station
  • the base station used to manage the serving cell is referred to as the serving base station.
  • the base station used to manage the cell can also be considered as the base station to which the cell belongs, the base station covering the cell, or the base station associated with (corresponding to) the cell, etc.
  • the source base station and the target base station are the same; when the source cell and the candidate cell are managed by the same base station, the source base station and the candidate base station are the same, and so on.
  • the source base station sends a handover command message to the UE (specifically, an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field (or information element, IE)).
  • This handover command message instructs the UE which target cell to hand over to and how to perform the handover.
  • the handover command message includes the target cell's identification information and configuration information.
  • the UE releases the connection with the source cell, stops data transmission with the source cell, and then accesses the target cell.
  • successful transmission of the handover command message is a necessary condition for a successful handover.
  • the cell identification information includes, for example, the cell index and cell identifier (physical cell identifier (PCI), cell global identifier (CGI), etc.).
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a traditional switching process:
  • Step 301 The source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.
  • Step 302 The target base station performs permission control, for example, the target base station allocates one or more of the following information to the UE: cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), random access channel (RACH) resources required for the UE to access the target cell, the RACH resources can be dedicated RACH resources or public RACH resources.
  • C-RNTI cell radio network temporary identifier
  • RACH random access channel
  • Step 303 The target base station sends a handover request acknowledgement message to the source base station.
  • the handover request confirmation message includes the target cell configuration information generated by the target base station after performing permission control.
  • the target cell configuration information includes the target cell parameter configuration and/or resource configuration.
  • the parameter configuration may specifically be RRC parameter configuration, which may include the C-RNTI generated for the UE.
  • the resource configuration may be the location of resources, which may include dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources.
  • Step 304 The source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message (i.e., a handover command message) to the UE.
  • RRC reconfiguration message i.e., a handover command message
  • the RRC reconfiguration message includes the target cell's identification and configuration information.
  • Step 305 The UE sends a random access request message to the target base station. For example, the UE sends a random access request message to the target base station based on the target cell's identification information and configuration information to request access to the target cell.
  • Step 306 The UE sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target base station.
  • the source base station sends CHO configuration information to the UE (which may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message).
  • the CHO configuration information includes configuration information and execution trigger conditions for one or more candidate cells.
  • the UE After receiving the CHO configuration information, the UE will not immediately initiate a handover to any candidate cell, but will continue to maintain the connection and data transmission with the source cell. Furthermore, after finding a candidate cell that meets the execution trigger conditions, the UE will autonomously decide to handover to that candidate cell (at this time, the candidate cell can also be referred to as the target cell).
  • the CHO process is similar to that shown in Figure 3, except that the source base station needs to send a handover request message to the candidate base station, receive the configuration information of the candidate cell from the candidate base station, and when the source base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE, the CHO configuration information includes the configuration information of the candidate cell. Therefore, when the UE selects a candidate cell as the target cell, it can handover to that candidate cell based on its configuration information.
  • the UE receives measurement configuration from the source base station. Based on this configuration, the UE measures signals from multiple neighboring cells to obtain measurement results. When the UE determines that the measurement results of a neighboring cell meet the aforementioned reporting conditions (event-triggered reporting or periodic-triggered reporting), it sends the neighboring cell's measurement results to the source base station via a measurement report.
  • the source base station makes a handover decision based on the measurement results reported by the UE to determine the target cell and target base station, and requests the target cell's configuration information from the target base station.
  • the target base station then sends the target cell's configuration information to the source base station.
  • the source base station sends a handover command message to the UE, which includes the target cell's configuration information.
  • the source base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE in advance.
  • the UE determines that the measurement result of a candidate cell meets the entry threshold of a certain measurement event and continues for a period of time (e.g., after a hysteresis time), and then uses the candidate cell as the target cell for handover.
  • the triggering condition corresponds to the reporting condition of the aforementioned measurement report or the execution triggering condition of the candidate cell.
  • CA Carrier aggregation
  • CA Carrier Aggregator
  • CA technology is used to aggregate two or more component carriers (CCs) to support greater transmission bandwidth.
  • the maximum bandwidth can be 100 MHz, and the bandwidth of each carrier unit can be 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.
  • CA technology involves primary cells (PCells) and secondary cells (SCells).
  • the primary cell is the cell used when the UE initially establishes a connection, or when re-establishing a connection via RRC (Reconnection Reconfiguration), or the primary cell designated during handover; the carrier unit corresponding to the primary cell is called the primary component carrier (PCC).
  • Primary component carrier PCC
  • Secondary cells are added during RRC reconfiguration to provide additional radio resources.
  • the carrier unit corresponding to the secondary cell is called the secondary component carrier (SCC).
  • the UE may not receive a handover command message beforehand.
  • RLF Recurrent Link Request
  • the UE may not receive CHO configuration information beforehand. In such cases, the UE must initiate an RRC (Re-establishment Call) procedure to request access to another cell. This leads to instability in UE communication.
  • this application provides a communication method to improve the stability of UE communication.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a communication method provided by this application:
  • Step 401 the UE obtains the first information.
  • the first information is prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • This prediction information can also be referred to as prediction information of a first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell (in the future or soon), prediction information of the serving cell, prediction information corresponding to the serving cell, etc., and may have other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • the service area can be one or more.
  • the first information can be used to indicate the predicted information of a first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and each serving cell in the future, or the first information can be used to indicate the predicted information of a first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the primary cell (equivalent to a serving cell).
  • there is one serving cell there is one serving cell.
  • the serving cell when the UE switches from the serving cell to the first cell (see the description in step 402 below), the serving cell can be considered as the source cell, and the first cell can be considered as the target cell.
  • Prediction information can also be called “inference information,” and “prediction” can also be called “inference.”
  • prediction information can have other names, and this application is not limited to any of them.
  • the first abnormal event includes at least RLF and/or the first HOF.
  • RLF includes at least one or more of the following:
  • a radio problem timer e.g., T310 in 5G
  • the RRC layer still has not received m consecutive synchronization indications from the physical layer by the time the radio problem timer expires, where n and m are positive integers.
  • the UE's RRC layer receives m synchronization indications from the physical layer before the radio problem timer expires, the UE stops the radio problem timer.
  • the cells are, for example, the primary cell.
  • RLF for a failed random access procedure For example, a random access procedure fails in a cell group, such as the primary cell group.
  • Radio link control (RLC) failure RLF Radio link control (RLC) failure RLF.
  • the UE's RRC layer receives an indication from the RLC layer of the cell group that the maximum number of retransmissions has been reached, such as the primary cell group.
  • BH RLF backhaul radio link failure
  • the first HOF includes at least one or more of the following:
  • an RLF occurs (e.g., an RLF occurs in the source cell).
  • the time point at which the UE determines that the measurement event entry condition is met is time point 1
  • the time point at which the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell is time point 2.
  • the first time period is specifically the time period between time point 1 and time point 2.
  • the UE Within the first time period from when the measurement event entry condition is met to when the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field), the UE detects a failure of the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) (e.g., detects a failure of the PDCCH of the source cell).
  • the source cell e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field
  • the definition of the first time period is given in (1) of the first HOF above.
  • the RLF may also include other RLFs, and this application does not limit the specific definition of the RLF.
  • the first HOF may also include other handover failure modes, and this application does not limit the specific definition of the first HOF.
  • the first information can be presented in the following three ways:
  • the first information includes the probability that a first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future. Furthermore, when there are multiple first abnormal events, the first information includes the probability of each first abnormal event occurring.
  • the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout
  • the first information includes ⁇ RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30% ⁇ .
  • the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout and an RLF where the random access procedure fails
  • the first information includes ⁇ RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30% ⁇ and ⁇ RLF where the random access procedure fails, probability of occurrence 20% ⁇ .
  • the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be referred to as the likelihood of the first abnormal event occurring, the accuracy of the occurrence of the first abnormal event, etc. This application does not limit the specific names.
  • the first information may also include the start time and/or end time of each first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring in the UE and the serving cell in the future, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring (which can be simply referred to as the probability accuracy). Furthermore, when there are multiple first abnormal events, the first information includes the probability of each first abnormal event occurring and the accuracy of the probability of that first abnormal event occurring.
  • the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout.
  • the first information includes ⁇ RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30%, accuracy 90% ⁇ .
  • the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout and an RLF where the random access procedure fails.
  • the first information includes ⁇ RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30%, accuracy 90% ⁇ and ⁇ RLF where the random access procedure fails, probability of occurrence 20%, accuracy 90% ⁇ .
  • the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be referred to as the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring, etc. This application does not limit the specific name.
  • the accuracy rate of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring is different from the aforementioned "accuracy rate of the first anomalous event.”
  • "Accuracy rate of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring” refers to the probability of the first anomalous event occurring, while “accuracy rate of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring” can also be considered the “accuracy rate of the accuracy rate of the first anomalous event.”
  • a 100% probability of the first abnormal event occurring is equivalent to the first abnormal event occurring 100% of the time; a 0% probability of the first abnormal event occurring is equivalent to the first abnormal event not occurring 100% of the time.
  • the 100% occurrence or non-occurrence of the first abnormal event corresponds to an accuracy rate, which can be converted into the probability of the first abnormal event occurring.
  • the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be considered to be 90%. If the accuracy rate of the first abnormal event not occurring 100% of the time is 90%, then the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be considered to be 10% (or the probability of the first abnormal event not occurring is 90%).
  • the accuracy of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring in the serving cell is determined by the model used by the UE.
  • the UE includes one or more models, each corresponding to its own accuracy rate.
  • the accuracy rate of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell is the accuracy rate corresponding to that model.
  • the UE includes model 1 and model 2, where model 1 corresponds to accuracy rate 1 and model 2 corresponds to accuracy rate 2.
  • the accuracy rate is accuracy rate 1; when the UE determines the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell based on model 2, the accuracy rate is accuracy rate 2.
  • the model can be used by the UE to determine the probability of different first anomalous events occurring in the serving cell, and the model's accuracy in predicting the probability of different first anomalous events may differ.
  • the model is used to determine the probability of anomalous events 1 through 7 occurring in the serving cell, and the accuracy rates for the probabilities of anomalous events 1 through 7 are accuracy rates 1 through 7, respectively.
  • the first information may also include the start time and/or end time of each first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first information includes whether the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future.
  • the first information includes indication information, which occupies 1 bit. When the value of this bit is 0, it indicates that the UE and the serving cell will not experience the first abnormal event in the future; when the value of this bit is 0, it indicates that the UE and the serving cell will experience the first abnormal event in the future.
  • the first abnormal event is one or more, and the indication information corresponds to the serving cell.
  • This indication information is used to indicate whether the serving cell can continue to serve as the UE's serving cell. This can be interpreted as follows: when the indication information indicates that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it is equivalent to the serving cell being unable to continue serving as the UE's serving cell, and the UE needs to perform the subsequent step 402; when the indication information indicates that the first abnormal event will not occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it is equivalent to the serving cell being able to continue serving as the UE's serving cell, and the UE does not need to perform the subsequent step 402.
  • Example 3-2 There are one or more first abnormal events.
  • each first abnormal event corresponds to its own indication information, that is, it is used to indicate whether each first abnormal event has occurred.
  • the first abnormal events include RLFs where a physical layer problem causes a timer to time out and RLFs where a random access procedure fails.
  • the first information includes ⁇ RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer to time out, indication information equals 1 ⁇ , ⁇ RLF where a random access procedure fails, indication information equals 0 ⁇ .
  • the first information may also include the start time and/or the end time of each first abnormal event.
  • the UE determines the first information itself.
  • the UE includes a model (e.g., an AI model), and the UE determines the first information based on the model.
  • the UE includes a preset algorithm, and the UE determines the first information based on the preset algorithm.
  • the UE may also determine the first information based on a prediction system or other methods.
  • the following explanation uses a model as an example.
  • the UE may input one or more of the following parameters into the model: the measurement results of the serving cell, the UE's movement information (e.g., movement speed, movement direction, geographical location), prediction information of other UEs and the serving cell in the future occurrence of the first abnormal event, and historical abnormal event information of the serving cell.
  • the UE's movement information e.g., movement speed, movement direction, geographical location
  • prediction information of other UEs and the serving cell in the future occurrence of the first abnormal event e.g., movement speed, movement direction, geographical location
  • historical abnormal event information of the serving cell e.g., historical abnormal event information of the serving cell.
  • the UE obtains the first information output by the model, which can be any one of the above methods 1 to 3.
  • the model outputs the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the UE determines the first information based on the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell and a first threshold.
  • the first information can be method 3 described above.
  • the first information is determined to include the possibility of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future; when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first information is determined to include the possibility that a first abnormal event will not occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the model outputs the probability and accuracy of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the UE determines the first information based on the probability, accuracy, first threshold, and second threshold of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first information can be as described in method 3 above. For example, when the UE determines that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than the first threshold and the accuracy of the probability is greater than the second threshold, the first information is determined to include the occurrence of the first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first information is determined to include the absence of the first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first threshold can also be called the possibility threshold, probability threshold, accuracy threshold, etc.
  • the second threshold can also be called the accuracy threshold, etc. This application does not limit the specific names.
  • the configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • Example 1 The UE includes one or more models, all of which correspond to the same first threshold. For example, the UE includes models 1 to 5, all of which correspond to the same first threshold 1.
  • Example 2 The UE includes multiple models, one or more of which correspond to a first threshold.
  • the UE includes models 1 to 5, which correspond to first thresholds 1 to 5 respectively; or, models 1 to 3 correspond to first thresholds 1 to 3 respectively, and models 4 and 5 together correspond to first threshold 4.
  • Example 3 The UE receives a measurement configuration from a first base station (also known as a serving base station, or the first access network device).
  • the measurement configuration includes one or more measurement identifiers, each corresponding to the same first threshold.
  • the measurement configuration includes measurement identifiers 1 to 5, each corresponding to the same first threshold 1.
  • Example 4 The UE receives a measurement configuration from a first base station.
  • the measurement configuration includes multiple measurement identifiers, one or more of which correspond to a first threshold.
  • the UE includes measurement identifiers 1 to 5, which correspond to first thresholds 1 to 5 respectively; or, measurement identifiers 1 to 3 correspond to first thresholds 1 to 3 respectively, and measurement identifiers 4 and 5 together correspond to first threshold 4.
  • “measurement identifier” can be replaced with “measurement object”, “report configuration” or “measurement event”, or “measurement identifier” can be replaced with any combination of “measurement identifier”, “measurement object”, “report configuration” or “measurement event”.
  • first threshold is, for example, 60%.
  • the configuration granularity of the second threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • Example (1) The UE includes one or more models, all of which correspond to the same second threshold. For a specific example, please refer to Example 1 above.
  • Example (2) The UE includes multiple models, one or more of which correspond to a second threshold. For a specific example, please refer to Example 2 above.
  • Example (3) The UE receives a measurement configuration from the first base station.
  • the measurement configuration includes one or more measurement identifiers, all of which correspond to the same second threshold.
  • the measurement configuration includes one or more measurement identifiers, all of which correspond to the same second threshold.
  • Example (4) The UE receives a measurement configuration from the first base station.
  • the measurement configuration includes multiple measurement identifiers, one or more of which correspond to a second threshold.
  • a second threshold For a specific example, please refer to Example 4 above.
  • “measurement identifier” can be replaced with “measurement object”, “report configuration” or “measurement event”, or “measurement identifier” can be replaced with any combination of “measurement identifier”, “measurement object”, “report configuration” or “measurement event”.
  • This second threshold is, for example, 90%.
  • the UE may also pre-configure or pre-define first indication information and/or second indication information.
  • the UE may also obtain the first indication information and/or second indication information from the first base station.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate what the first abnormal event (or the type of the first abnormal event) specifically is.
  • the first indication information includes an identifier of a first abnormal event that the UE needs to predict. For example, if the first indication information includes identifiers of three abnormal events: a physical layer problem causing a timer timeout, a random access procedure failure, and an LBT failure detection, then the first abnormal event includes the physical layer problem causing a timer timeout, the random access procedure failure, and the LBT failure detection.
  • the first indication information includes identifiers of multiple abnormal events and corresponding indication information for those abnormal events.
  • the indication information is used by the UE to determine whether to predict the abnormal event. For example, the indication information is one bit; when the bit is 0, the UE determines not to predict the abnormal event; when the bit is 1, the UE determines to predict the abnormal event.
  • the first indication information includes ⁇ identifier of RLF causing timer timeout due to physical layer problem, 1 ⁇ , ⁇ identifier of RLF causing random access procedure failure, 1 ⁇ , ⁇ identifier of RLF detecting LBT failure, 1 ⁇ , and ⁇ identifier of BH RLF, 0 ⁇
  • the first abnormal event includes RLF causing timer timeout due to physical layer problem, RLF causing random access procedure failure, and RLF detecting LBT failure.
  • the model can determine the probabilities (or probabilities and their accuracy, or whether an abnormal event has occurred) of which abnormal events are included in the first information based on the first abnormal event indicated by the first indication information.
  • the UE determines the first information from the probabilities (or probabilities and their accuracy, or whether an abnormal event has occurred) of multiple abnormal events output by the model based on the first indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate at least one measurement item.
  • the at least one measurement item includes at least one of: a measurement identifier, a measurement object, a report configuration, or a measurement event.
  • the UE can measure the reference signal of the serving cell according to the second indication information to obtain the measurement results corresponding to at least one measurement item. Subsequently, the UE can determine first information based on the measurement results corresponding to at least one measurement item. For example, the UE inputs the measurement results corresponding to at least one measurement item (i.e., as the measurement results of the serving cell) into the model, and the model outputs the first information, or the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future and the accuracy of the probability.
  • the UE obtains the first information from other devices. These other devices could be, for example, other UEs.
  • step 402 when the UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information, it accesses the first cell before a first time.
  • the first time is determined based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event predicted by the UE.
  • the first cell is different from the serving cell.
  • the following explains how the UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information, in two scenarios:
  • Scenario 1 when there is only one serving cell, or when there are multiple serving cells and the first information is used to indicate the predicted information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the primary cell (i.e., one serving cell) in the future, can be illustrated by the following examples 1 to 3:
  • Example 1 When the UE determines that the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the UE determines that the first information indicates that the UE and the serving cell will not experience a first abnormal event in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first preset condition is that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future.
  • the first information includes indication information used to indicate whether the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future (e.g., method 3 described above).
  • the first information includes indication information, which corresponds to the serving cell. This indication information is used to indicate that when the UE and the serving cell experience a first abnormal event in the future, the first preset condition is met.
  • the first information includes indication information corresponding to multiple first abnormal events, and the indication information corresponding to each first abnormal event is used to indicate whether the first abnormal event has occurred. Further, when the UE determines that a first abnormal event greater than or equal to a preset percentage of 1 will occur in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met; otherwise, it determines that the first preset condition is not met. For example, if there are 3 first abnormal events (denoted as first abnormal event 1 to first abnormal event 3), the preset percentage of 1 is 50%, and the first information indicates that first abnormal event 1 occurs, first abnormal event 2 occurs, and first abnormal event 3 does not occur, then the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the preset percentage of 1 can also be replaced with a preset quantity of 1.
  • the preset quantity of 1 is equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that one or more first abnormal events will occur in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the preset quantity of 1 is equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that one or more first abnormal events will occur in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • Example 2 When the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than a first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. Conversely, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, as indicated by the first information, is less than or equal to the first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold.
  • This application may also replace “greater than” with “greater than or equal to”, and the corresponding "less than or equal to” with “less than”.
  • the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future (e.g., method 1 above).
  • the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future. That is, when the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold (e.g., in method 1 above), it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and thus determining that the first preset condition is met.
  • a first threshold e.g., in method 1 above
  • the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the first abnormal event will not occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and thus determining that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first information includes the probability corresponding to each of the multiple first abnormal events. Furthermore, when the UE determines that the probability corresponding to a first abnormal event greater than or equal to a preset percentage 2 is greater than a first threshold, it determines that the first preset condition is met; otherwise, it determines that the first preset condition is not met. For example, if there are three first abnormal events (denoted as first abnormal event 1 to first abnormal event 3), the preset percentage 2 is 50%, the first threshold is 60%, and the first information indicates that the probability of first abnormal event 1 occurring is 90%, the probability of first abnormal event 2 occurring is 90%, and the probability of first abnormal event 3 occurring is 20%, then the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the preset percentage 2 can also be replaced with a preset quantity 2.
  • the preset quantity 2 is equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that the probability of one or more first abnormal events occurring is greater than the first threshold, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • the first threshold please refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiments related to "UE determining first information”.
  • Example 3 When the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • the UE determines that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to a first threshold, and/or when the accuracy of the UE in determining the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to a second threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • This application may also replace “greater than” with “greater than or equal to”, and the corresponding "less than or equal to” with “less than”.
  • the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring (e.g., method 2 above).
  • the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future. That is, when the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the UE and the serving cell experiencing a first abnormal event in the future is greater than a second threshold (e.g., in method 2 above), it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future, and thus the first preset condition is satisfied.
  • a second threshold e.g., in method 2 above
  • the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or when the UE determines that the accuracy of the probability of the first information indicating that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the UE and the serving cell will not experience a first abnormal event in the future, and thus the first preset condition is not satisfied.
  • the first information includes the probability and accuracy of each first abnormal event. Further, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event greater than or equal to a preset percentage of 3 is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of these probabilities greater than or equal to a preset percentage of 4 is greater than a second threshold. For example, if there are 4 first abnormal events, the preset percentage of 3 is 50%, the preset percentage of 4 is 50%, the probability of 3 first abnormal events in the first information is greater than the first threshold, and the accuracy of 2 of these 3 probabilities is greater than the second threshold.
  • the preset percentage of 3 can be replaced with a preset quantity of 3
  • the preset percentage of 4 can be replaced with a preset quantity of 4.
  • both the preset quantity of 3 and the preset quantity of 4 are equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that the probability of a first abnormal event is greater than the first threshold and the accuracy of the probability is greater than the second threshold, the first preset condition is determined to be met.
  • the configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • the configuration granularity of the second threshold can also be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • Scenario 2 When there are multiple serving cells, and the first information is used to indicate the predicted information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and multiple serving cells in the future, the specific examples are as follows (I) to (III):
  • Example (1) When the UE determines that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the first preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the first serving cell is the serving cell where the first abnormal event will occur with the UE in the future.
  • the first preset percentage is 50%, and the UE accesses serving cell 1 to serving cell 3.
  • the first information indicates that the UE and serving cell 1 will experience a first abnormal event in the future, the UE and serving cell 2 will experience a first abnormal event in the future, and the UE and serving cell 3 will experience a first abnormal event in the future. That is, serving cell 1 to serving cell 3 are all the first serving cells, and the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the UE determines that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells is less than or equal to the first preset proportion. Furthermore, when the UE determines that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells is less than or equal to the first preset proportion, the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first preset percentage is 50%, and the UE accesses serving cell 1 to serving cell 3.
  • the first information indicates that the UE and serving cell 1 will experience a first abnormal event in the future, the UE and serving cell 2 will not experience a first abnormal event in the future, and the UE and serving cell 3 will not experience a first abnormal event in the future. That is, serving cell 1 is the first serving cell, and the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first preset condition is that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells is greater than the first preset proportion.
  • the first preset percentage can also be replaced by a first preset quantity. That is, when the UE determines that the number of first serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the first preset quantity, the first preset condition is satisfied; when the UE determines that the number of first serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the first preset quantity, the first preset condition is not satisfied.
  • the first preset quantity is equal to 0. This can be understood as the UE determining that the first preset condition is satisfied when it determines that the first serving cell exists among multiple serving cells; and the UE determining that the first preset condition is not satisfied when it determines that none of the multiple serving cells are the first serving cell.
  • the first information includes indication information corresponding to each serving cell.
  • the UE determines whether each serving cell is the first serving cell based on the indication information corresponding to each serving cell (corresponding to example a above).
  • Approach b The first information includes indication information corresponding to each of the multiple first abnormal events when multiple first abnormal events occur in each serving cell.
  • the UE determines whether each serving cell is the first serving cell based on the indication information corresponding to each of the multiple first abnormal events (corresponding to example b above).
  • Example 1 above please refer to Example 1 above.
  • Example (2) When the UE determines that the proportion of the second serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the second preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the second serving cell is a serving cell whose probability of a first abnormal event occurring with the UE in the future is greater than a first threshold.
  • the UE determines that the proportion of the second serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the second preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is not met.
  • the first preset condition is that the proportion of the second serving cell among multiple serving cells is greater than the second preset proportion.
  • the second preset percentage can also be replaced by a second preset quantity. That is, when the UE determines that the number of second serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the second preset quantity, the first preset condition is satisfied; when the UE determines that the number of second serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the second preset quantity, the first preset condition is not satisfied.
  • the second preset quantity is equal to 0. This can be understood as the UE determining that the first preset condition is satisfied when it determines that a second serving cell exists among multiple serving cells, and that the first preset condition is not satisfied when it determines that none of the multiple serving cells are the second serving cell.
  • the UE can determine whether each serving cell is a second serving cell based on the probability of each of the multiple first abnormal events occurring in each serving cell in the first information. For details, please refer to Example 2 above.
  • the configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • the first threshold please refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiments related to "UE determining first information”.
  • Example (3) When the UE determines that the proportion of the third serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the third preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the third serving cell is a serving cell whose probability of a first abnormal event occurring with the UE in the future is greater than a first threshold, and whose accuracy in predicting the probability of a first abnormal event occurring with the UE is greater than a second threshold.
  • the first preset condition is that the proportion of the third serving cell among multiple serving cells is greater than the third preset proportion.
  • the third preset percentage can also be replaced by a third preset quantity. That is, when the UE determines that the number of third serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the third preset quantity, the first preset condition is satisfied; when the UE determines that the number of third serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the third preset quantity, the first preset condition is not satisfied.
  • the third preset quantity is equal to 0. This can be understood as the UE determining that the first preset condition is satisfied when it determines that a third serving cell exists among multiple serving cells, and that the first preset condition is not satisfied when it determines that none of the multiple serving cells are third serving cells.
  • the UE can determine whether each serving cell is the third serving cell based on the probability and accuracy of each first abnormal event occurring in each serving cell in the first information. For details, please refer to Example 3 above.
  • the configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • the configuration granularity of the second threshold can also be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • the configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on either the model configuration or the measurement configuration.
  • the UE may have a first preset condition pre-configured or pre-defined. Also for example, the UE may obtain the first preset condition from the first base station.
  • the first preset condition, the first instruction information, and the second instruction information can be collectively referred to as the seventh information.
  • the first base station sends the seventh information to the UE, and correspondingly, the UE receives the seventh information from the first base station.
  • the seventh information is carried in an RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a measurement configuration, which includes the seventh information; or, for another example, the RRC message is an RRC reconfiguration message, which includes the seventh information.
  • the UE has pre-configured or pre-defined seventh information.
  • the UE's memory stores the seventh information, and the UE's processor can read (or retrieve) the seventh information from the memory.
  • the triggering conditions for the UE to determine the first information can be as follows: The UE periodically determines the first information, which can be configured by the first base station (e.g., carried in the seventh information) or pre-configured. Alternatively, the UE determines the first information in response to the seventh information received from the first base station. Alternatively, the UE determines the first information after determining the measurement result of a neighboring cell. Alternatively, the UE determines the first information before performing neighboring cell measurements. Of course, the UE can also determine the first information under other triggering conditions, which are not limited in this application.
  • the UE can determine the first time based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future. For example, when there is only one first abnormal event, the UE can determine the first time as the occurrence time of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future; when there are multiple first abnormal events, the UE can take the earliest (or latest) occurrence time among the multiple first abnormal events that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future as the first time.
  • the UE can determine the first time based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event between the UE and the primary cell in the future (see the previous embodiment for details). Alternatively, the UE can determine the first time based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event between the UE and each of the multiple serving cells in the future. For example, the UE can use the earliest (or latest) occurrence time among the occurrence times of the first abnormal event between the UE and each of the multiple serving cells in the future as the first time.
  • UE access to the first cell can be implemented in the following ways, from Method 1 to Method 4:
  • Implementation method 1 The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, and the measurement report is used to trigger the first base station to select a target cell for the UE.
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, which includes signal quality information (or measurement results) of multiple second cells.
  • the first base station receives the measurement report from the UE and, based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells in the report, selects a first cell (equivalent to a target cell) from among the multiple second cells. Subsequently, the first base station sends the configuration information of the first cell to the UE.
  • the UE receives the configuration information of the first cell from the first base station and, based on the configuration information, switches to the first cell.
  • the multiple second cells can specifically be multiple neighboring cells of the serving cell.
  • the first base station before the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, the first base station also sends a measurement configuration to the UE, which can be used to indicate multiple second cells.
  • the measurement configuration includes third indication information, which is used to indicate multiple second cells.
  • the third indication information includes identification information of multiple second cells; or, for example, the third indication information includes a measurement frequency point, which the UE can use to determine multiple second cells covering that measurement frequency point.
  • the signal quality information of the second cell can be obtained by the UE measuring the downlink reference signal of the second cell.
  • the downlink reference signal can be, for example, one or more of CSI-RS and SSB.
  • Signal quality information can be, for example, RSRP, RSSI, RSRQ, and SINR.
  • the configuration information of the first cell is used for UE handover (access) to the first cell.
  • the configuration information of the first cell includes the parameter configuration and resource configuration of the first cell.
  • the parameter configuration of the first cell includes the C-RNTI generated by its associated base station for the UE; the resources of the first cell include the resources required for the UE to randomly access the first cell, such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources.
  • the first base station When the first base station sends the configuration information of the first cell to the UE, specifically, the first base station sends fifth information to the UE.
  • This fifth information includes the configuration information of the first cell and is used to instruct the UE to switch to the first cell according to the configuration information.
  • the fifth information is a handover command message, which may be an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the ⁇ reconfigurationWithSync ⁇ field.
  • the first base station Before sending the configuration information of the first cell to the UE, the first base station can also obtain the configuration information of the first cell. Based on whether the first cell is associated with the first base station, two operations for the first base station are provided below. Operation 1 applies to scenarios where the first cell and the serving cell are managed by the same base station; operation 2 applies to scenarios where the first cell and the serving cell are managed by two different base stations, i.e., the first cell is managed by a second base station (i.e., a second access network device) and the first and second base stations are different.
  • a second base station i.e., a second access network device
  • Operation 1 The first base station determines the configuration information of the first cell.
  • Operation 2 The first base station sends a handover request message to the second base station.
  • the second base station determines the configuration information of the first cell and sends the configuration information of the first cell to the first base station through a handover request confirmation message.
  • the measurement report may also include signal quality information of the serving cell.
  • the serving cell may be one or more.
  • the measurement report may also include first information or a portion of first information.
  • the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and the start and end times of the first abnormal event
  • the measurement report may carry the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell (i.e., a portion of the first information).
  • the first base station can determine the reason why the UE sends the measurement report based on the first information, select a suitable first cell for the UE, and instruct the UE to hand over to the first cell.
  • the measurement report may also include eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell (which may be referred to as the fifth cell) among multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition.
  • the prediction information for the second cell refers to the prediction information of a second abnormal event occurring when the second cell serves as the target cell for UE handover.
  • the prediction information for the second cell may include one or more of the following: whether a second abnormal event occurs in the second cell, the probability of a second abnormal event occurring in the second cell, the accuracy of the probability of a second abnormal event occurring in the second cell, the start time of the second abnormal event occurring in the second cell, and the end time of the second abnormal event occurring in the second cell.
  • the method by which the UE determines the prediction information of a second abnormal event occurring in the second cell is the same as the method described above for the UE to determine the prediction information of a first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell.
  • the second preset condition is that no second abnormal event occurs when the second cell is the target cell; or, the second preset condition is that the probability of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is the target cell is less than the first threshold; or, the second preset condition is that the probability of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is the target cell is less than the first threshold and the accuracy of the probability is greater than the second threshold.
  • the configuration granularity of the first and second thresholds can be found in the descriptions of the first and second thresholds above.
  • the second information includes the identification information of the fifth cell.
  • the second information may include the combination corresponding to the fifth cell, which includes the identification information of the fifth cell and the probability of the second abnormal event occurring (or the probability of the second abnormal event occurring and the accuracy of the probability of the second abnormal event occurring).
  • the combination corresponding to the fifth cell may also include the start time and/or end time of the second abnormal event occurring.
  • the second information may include the combination corresponding to the fifth cell, which includes the identification information of the fifth cell and the absence of the second abnormal event.
  • the second information may include the prediction information corresponding to the fifth cell.
  • the second information may include combinations corresponding to the second cell.
  • each combination corresponding to the second cell may include the identification information of the second cell and the probability of the second abnormal event occurring (or the probability of the second abnormal event occurring and the accuracy of the probability of the second abnormal event occurring).
  • the combination corresponding to the second cell may also include the start time and/or end time of the second abnormal event.
  • the second abnormal event can specifically be a mobility abnormal event, including one or more of the following: too late handover, too early handover, handover to the wrong cell, unnecessary handover, ping-pong handover, RLF, and second HOF. Specific details are as follows:
  • Late Handover After a UE has been connected to the serving cell for a period of time, a Relationship Default (RLF) may occur between the UE and the serving cell. The UE then attempts to re-establish a connection with another cell. This situation mainly refers to a deterioration in the signal quality of the serving cell, where the UE does not receive a handover command message from the serving base station. Therefore, the UE attempts to re-establish a connection with another cell only after the serving cell detects the RLF.
  • RLF Relationship Default
  • Premature handover After the UE successfully hands over from the source cell to the target cell, the UE quickly experiences an RLF with the target cell; or, the UE fails to handover during the process of handover from the source cell to the target cell, and the UE attempts to rebuild the connection in the source cell.
  • the source system could be, for example, a New Radio (NR) system
  • the target system could be, for example, an Evolution UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) system. Therefore, this handover may be considered unnecessary, or referred to as an unnecessary cross-system handover, or a premature cross-system handover without connection failure.
  • NR New Radio
  • E-UTRAN Evolution UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • the UE can switch from the source cell to the target cell.
  • Ping-Pong Handover The UE switches from a cell in the source system to a cell in the target system. Within a predefined limited time, the UE switches back to a cell in the source system, where the coverage of the source system is sufficient to meet the UE's service needs.
  • the source system could be an NR system
  • the target system could be an E-UTRAN system.
  • the UE switches from a source cell to a target cell, and within a predefined limited time, switches back to the source cell, where the coverage of the source cell is sufficient to meet the UE's service needs.
  • RLF includes at least one or more of the following:
  • RLF caused by physical layer problem leading to timer timeout (1) RLF caused by physical layer problem leading to timer timeout. (2) RLF caused by timer timeout triggered when wireless problem timer is running and measurement reporting is initiated. (3) RLF caused by random access procedure failure. (4) RLF caused by RLC failure. (5) RLF caused by detection of continuous uplink LBT failure. (6) RLF caused by receiving BH RLF from the parent node for IAB MT. See step 401 above for details.
  • the second HOF includes at least one or more of the following:
  • the UE After receiving a handover command message from the source cell (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field), the UE starts a handover timer (e.g., T304 in 5G). If the UE successfully completes random access in the target cell before the handover timer expires, it indicates that the UE has successfully handed over from the source cell to the target cell, and the UE stops the handover timer. If the UE still fails to successfully complete random access in the target cell when the handover timer expires, it indicates that the UE has not successfully handed over from the source cell to the target cell, i.e., the handover has failed.
  • a handover timer e.g., T304 in 5G
  • the UE detects a PDCCH failure. See step 401 above for details.
  • the UE detects a PDCCH failure (e.g., detects a PDCCH failure in the target cell).
  • the transmission of the handover completion message is the UE's response to the handover command message.
  • the time point at which the UE determines that it has received the handover command message from the source cell is time point 3, and the time point at which the UE successfully transmits the handover completion message is time point 4.
  • the second time period is specifically the time period between time point 3 and time point 4.
  • the second HOF may also include other switching failure modes, and this application does not limit the specific definition of the second HOF.
  • the first base station when selecting a first cell for the UE, the first base station considers not only the signal quality of multiple second cells, but also the predicted information of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is used as the target cell for UE handover.
  • the first cell could be a second cell with good signal quality and no second abnormal event, or a second cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event occurring, or a second cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event occurring, and a relatively high accuracy rate in predicting the probability. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.
  • the measurement report may also include a first timeframe, during which the first base station may send the configuration information of the first cell to the UE at a second timeframe.
  • the second timeframe is earlier than the first timeframe; in other words, the second timeframe must ensure that the UE can access the first cell before the first timeframe.
  • the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. That is, this application defines a new way to trigger the reporting of measurement reports: the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. In other words, the UE uses "determining that the first preset condition is met" as a trigger condition for sending a measurement report, or as a newly defined measurement event. This helps to trigger the first base station to send a handover command message to the UE as quickly as possible, thus helping to ensure the stability of UE communication.
  • Method 2 The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, which triggers the first base station to select a candidate cell for the UE.
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, which includes signal quality information from multiple second cells.
  • the first base station receives the measurement report from the UE, selects candidate cells from the multiple second cells based on the measurement report, and sends the configuration information of the candidate cells to the UE.
  • the UE receives the configuration information of the candidate cells from the first base station, selects a first cell from the candidate cells based on the downlink reference signal of the candidate cells, and then switches to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell.
  • the multiple second cells can specifically be multiple neighboring cells of the serving cell. For example, before the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, the first base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, which indicates the multiple second cells. See the description in Implementation Method 1 for details.
  • the signal quality information of the second cell can be obtained by the UE measuring the downlink reference signal of the second cell.
  • the downlink reference signal may be one or more of CSI-RS and SSB.
  • Signal quality information may include RSRP, RSSI, RSRQ, and SINR.
  • the configuration information of a candidate cell is used by the UE to hand over to that candidate cell.
  • the configuration information includes the candidate cell's parameter configuration and resource configuration.
  • the candidate cell's parameter configuration includes the C-RNTI generated by its base station for the UE; the candidate cell's resources include the resources required for the UE to randomly access the candidate cell, such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources.
  • the candidate cell's configuration information also includes the candidate cell's execution triggering conditions. When the UE determines that the downlink reference signal (or signal quality information) of the candidate cell meets the candidate cell's execution triggering conditions, it autonomously decides to hand over to that candidate cell.
  • the first base station When the first base station sends the configuration information of candidate cells to the UE, it may specifically send sixth information to the UE.
  • This sixth information includes the configuration information of the candidate cells and is used to instruct the UE to select a first cell from the candidate cells based on the configuration information corresponding to each candidate cell, and then switch to the first cell.
  • the sixth information may specifically be CHO configuration information, which may be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message. There may be one or more candidate cells.
  • the first base station Before sending the candidate cell configuration information to the UE, the first base station can first obtain the candidate cell configuration information. Based on whether the candidate cell is associated with the first base station, the following two operations of the first base station are provided. Operation 1 is applicable to the scenario where the candidate cell and the serving cell are managed by the same base station, that is, the candidate cell is managed by the first base station; Operation 2 is applicable to the scenario where the candidate cell and the serving cell are managed by two different base stations, that is, the candidate cell is managed by the candidate base station and the first base station and the candidate base station are different.
  • the first base station determines the configuration information of the candidate cells. For example, the first base station may also determine the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cells and send the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cells to the UE along with the configuration information of the candidate cells.
  • the first base station sends a handover request message to the candidate base station.
  • the candidate base station determines the configuration information of the candidate cell and sends the configuration information of the candidate cell to the first base station via a handover request confirmation message.
  • the first base station can also determine the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cell and send the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cell to the UE along with the configuration information of the candidate cell.
  • the measurement report may also include signal quality information of the serving cell.
  • the serving cell may be one or more.
  • the measurement report may also include first information or a portion of the first information.
  • the measurement report may also include prediction information of second abnormal events occurring when multiple second cells are respectively used as target cells for UE handover. Specific implementations can be found in the description of Implementation Method 1.
  • the first base station when it selects a candidate cell for the UE, it considers not only the signal quality of multiple second cells, but also the predicted information of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is used as the target cell during UE handover.
  • a candidate cell could be a second cell with good signal quality that does not experience the second abnormal event, or a second cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of experiencing the second abnormal event, or a second cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of experiencing the second abnormal event, and a relatively high accuracy in probability calculation. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.
  • the measurement report may also include a first timeframe, during which the first base station may send the configuration information of the first cell to the UE at a second timeframe.
  • the second timeframe is earlier than the first timeframe; in other words, the second timeframe must ensure that the UE can access the first cell before the first timeframe.
  • the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. That is, this application defines a new way to trigger the reporting of measurement reports: the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. In other words, the UE uses "determining that the first preset condition is met" as a trigger condition for sending a measurement report, or as a newly defined measurement event. This helps to trigger the first base station to send a handover command message to the UE as quickly as possible, thus helping to ensure the stability of UE communication.
  • the UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple third cells to obtain signal quality information for these cells. Based on this signal quality information, the UE selects a first cell from among the third cells. The UE then sends second information to the base station associated with the first cell (referred to as the second base station, equivalent to a second access network device), whereby the second information is used to indicate (or request) access to the first cell.
  • the second base station equivalent to a second access network device
  • the second information may be an RRC re-establishment request message.
  • the RRC re-establishment request message may carry reconstruction reason information.
  • the reconstruction reason information may include prediction information about a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE's prediction of a first abnormal event occurring with the serving cell in the future, or the UE's prediction of a first abnormal event occurring with the serving cell in the future based on a model, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE's prediction of an RLF (Recurrent Leak) occurring with the serving cell in the future, etc.
  • RLF Recurrent Leak
  • Multiple third cells can specifically be multiple neighboring cells of the serving cell. For example, before the UE initiates the RRC re-establishment procedure itself, the first base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, which is used to indicate multiple third cells.
  • the first cell can be the cell with better signal quality among multiple third cells.
  • the UE also predicts the occurrence of a second abnormal event when multiple third cells are used as the target cell during UE handover.
  • the first cell can be a third cell with good signal quality and no second abnormal event, or a third cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of a second abnormal event, or a third cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of a second abnormal event, and a relatively high accuracy rate in predicting the probability. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.
  • the UE before accessing the first cell, the UE also receives third information from the first base station, which indicates configuration information for multiple fourth cells.
  • the third information includes configuration information for multiple fourth cells.
  • the UE measures the downlink reference signals of the multiple fourth cells to obtain signal quality information for each fourth cell. Based on the signal quality information of the multiple fourth cells, the UE determines the first cell from among the multiple fourth cells. Then, the UE switches to the first cell based on its configuration information.
  • the fourth cell is a candidate cell determined by the first base station for the UE, and the third information is CHO configuration information.
  • the CHO configuration information includes configuration information for multiple fourth cells.
  • the CHO configuration information is, for example, carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the configuration information of the fourth cell is used for UE handover to this fourth cell.
  • the configuration information of the fourth cell includes parameter configuration and resource configuration.
  • the parameter configuration of the fourth cell includes the C-RNTI generated by its associated base station for the UE; the resources of the fourth cell include the resources required for the UE to randomly access the fourth cell, such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources.
  • the configuration information of the fourth cell also includes the execution triggering conditions of the fourth cell. For example, when the UE determines that the downlink reference signal (or signal quality information) of the fourth cell meets the execution triggering conditions of the fourth cell, it autonomously decides to handover to this fourth cell.
  • the first cell can be the cell with better signal quality among multiple fourth cells.
  • the UE also predicts the occurrence of a second abnormal event when multiple fourth cells are used as the target cell during UE handover, as detailed in the description of Implementation Method 1 above.
  • the first cell can be a fourth cell with good signal quality and no second abnormal event, or a fourth cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event, or a fourth cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event, and a relatively high accuracy rate in predicting the probability. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.
  • the UE may also disregard the execution triggering condition and select the first cell from multiple fourth cells, thereby avoiding the UE failing to select the first cell and affecting the stability of UE communication.
  • Figure 5 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a first specific scenario.
  • the UE predicts a first abnormal event that may occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and when it determines that a first preset condition is met, it sends the measurement result to the first base station.
  • the first base station then sends a handover command message (an example of the fifth information) to the UE based on the measurement result.
  • Step 501 The first base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE.
  • the measurement configuration includes seventh information and third indication information.
  • step 501 can be replaced by: step 501a, the serving base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, the measurement configuration including third indication information; step 501b, the serving base station sends seventh information to the UE.
  • step 501 can be replaced by: step 501a, the serving base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, the measurement configuration including third indication information; step 501b, the UE obtains predefined (or pre-configured) seventh information.
  • predefined (or pre-configured) seventh information there may be other methods, which will not be listed in this application.
  • the seventh information includes one or more of the first preset condition, the first instruction information, and the second instruction information.
  • the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold.
  • the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first abnormal event, which includes at least an RLF and/or a first HOF.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate at least one measurement item, which includes at least one of the following: measurement identifier, measurement object, report configuration, or measurement event.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate multiple second cells.
  • the third indication information includes identification information of multiple second cells, or, for example, measurement frequency points associated with multiple second cells.
  • Step 502 The UE determines the first information based on the model.
  • the first information is the prediction information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • Step 503 The UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information.
  • the UE determines that the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the probability that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • Step 504 The UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple second cells to obtain signal quality information of multiple second cells. Step 504 is located after step 501, but the order of step 504 and step 502 (or step 503) is not limited.
  • Step 505 The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station.
  • the measurement report includes signal quality information for multiple second cells.
  • the measurement report may also include first information.
  • the measurement report may also include eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell (i.e., the fifth cell) among the multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition.
  • step 503 is the trigger condition for step 505. That is, once the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, it can send a measurement report to the first base station. This helps to trigger the first base station to send a handover command message to the UE as soon as possible.
  • Step 506 The first base station selects a target cell (equivalent to the first cell) from multiple second cells based on the measurement report.
  • the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality from the multiple second cells as the target cell based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells.
  • the measurement report also includes eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell among the multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition.
  • the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and no second abnormal event as the target cell based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells and the eighth information, or the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event (or a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event and a relatively high accuracy of the probability) as the target cell.
  • Step 507 The first base station sends a handover request message to the base station associated with the first cell (i.e., the target base station, or the second base station).
  • Step 508 The second base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station. Specifically, the second base station generates the configuration information of the first cell and sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station, the handover request confirmation message including the configuration information of the first cell.
  • Step 509 The first base station sends a handover command message to the UE.
  • the handover command message includes the configuration information of the first cell.
  • Step 510 The UE sends a random access request message to the second base station to request access to the first cell.
  • Figure 6 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a second specific scenario.
  • the UE predicts a first abnormal event that may occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and sends the measurement result to the first base station when it determines that a first preset condition is met.
  • the first base station then sends CHO configuration information (an example of the sixth information) to the UE based on the measurement result.
  • Steps 601 to 605 are similar to steps 501 to 505.
  • Step 606 The first base station selects a candidate cell from multiple second cells based on the measurement report.
  • K candidate cells There can be K candidate cells, where K is an integer greater than 1.
  • the first base station selects a second cell with better signal quality from multiple second cells as a candidate cell based on the signal quality information of multiple second cells.
  • the measurement report also includes eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell among the multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition.
  • the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and no second abnormal event as a candidate cell based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells and the eighth information, or the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event (the probability of the second abnormal event is relatively low and the accuracy of the probability is relatively high) as a candidate cell.
  • Step 607 The first base station sends a handover request message to the base station associated with the candidate cell. Further, for clarity, Figure 6 shows a second base station and a third base station, each associated with one of the two candidate cells.
  • the base stations used to manage different candidate cells are different; that is, there are also K base stations used to manage K candidate cells, and these K base stations are all different from each other.
  • the number of base stations will be less than the number of candidate cells. For example, if there are 10 candidate cells (represented as candidate cell 1 to candidate cell 10), candidate cells 1 to 5 are managed by base station 1, and candidate cells 6 to 10 are managed by base station 2. In this case, the number of base stations used to manage the 10 candidate cells is 2.
  • this application uses the first implementation method as an example, and this description can also be used in other embodiments.
  • Step 608 The base station associated with the candidate cell sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station.
  • This message includes configuration information of the candidate cell, which is used by the UE to access the candidate cell. Further, for clarity, Figure 6 shows the second and third base stations sending handover request confirmation messages to the first base station.
  • the first base station may select K’ candidate cells.
  • the first base station sends handover request messages to each of the K’ base stations.
  • K of the K’ base stations send handover request confirmation messages to the first base station, while the other K’-K base stations send handover request rejection messages to the first base station.
  • K’ is a positive integer greater than K.
  • Step 609 The first base station sends CHO configuration information to the UE.
  • the CHO configuration information includes the configuration information of K candidate cells.
  • the K candidate cells include the first cell.
  • Step 610 The UE selects the target cell (equivalent to the first cell) from the candidate cells.
  • the UE continues to measure the downlink reference signals of K candidate cells to obtain the signal quality information of the K candidate cells. Based on the signal quality information of the K candidate cells, the UE selects the candidate cell with better signal quality from the K candidate cells as the first cell.
  • the configuration information of each candidate cell may further include the execution triggering condition of the candidate cell, which may be determined by the first base station based on the signal quality information of the candidate cell.
  • the UE continues to measure the downlink reference signals of the K candidate cells to obtain the signal quality information of the K candidate cells. Subsequently, the UE can select the candidate cell whose signal quality information meets the execution triggering condition of the candidate cell from the K candidate cells as the target cell.
  • Step 611 The UE sends a random access request message to the second base station to request access to the first cell.
  • the second base station is associated with the first cell.
  • Figure 7 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a third specific scenario.
  • the UE predicts the occurrence of a first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and initiates an RRC re-establishment process when it is determined that the first preset condition is met.
  • Step 701 The first base station sends the seventh information to the UE.
  • the UE receives the seventh information from the first base station.
  • Step 701 is an optional step.
  • the UE may also pre-configure (or pre-define) the seventh information.
  • the seventh information includes one or more of the first preset condition, the first instruction information, and the second instruction information.
  • the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold.
  • the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first abnormal event, which includes at least an RLF and/or a first HOF.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate at least one measurement item, which includes at least one of the following: measurement identifier, measurement object, report configuration, or measurement event.
  • Step 702 The UE determines the first information based on the model.
  • the first information is the prediction information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.
  • Step 703 The UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information.
  • the UE determines that the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.
  • the probability that the first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability that the first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • Step 704 The UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple third cells to obtain signal quality information of multiple third cells. Based on the signal quality information of multiple third cells, the UE selects the third cell with better signal quality from the multiple third cells as the first cell.
  • Step 705 The UE sends an RRC re-establishment request message (an example of the second information) to the second base station to access the first cell.
  • RRC re-establishment request message an example of the second information
  • the second base station is associated with the first cell.
  • the RRC Re-establishment Request message can carry reconstruction reason information.
  • the reconstruction reason information may include prediction information of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE predicting that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE predicting that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future through a model, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE predicting that an RLF will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, etc.
  • Figure 8 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a fourth specific scenario.
  • the UE predicts the occurrence of a first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and selects a candidate cell for handover when it is determined that the first preset condition is met.
  • Steps 801 to 803 are similar to steps 701 to 703.
  • Step 804 The first base station sends CHO configuration information (an example of third information) to the UE.
  • Step 804 occurs before step 805, but the order of step 804 with step 801 (or step 802/step 803) is not limited.
  • the seventh message and CHO configuration information can be carried in the same RRC reconfiguration message (in which case, steps 801 and 804 can be considered to occur simultaneously), or they can be carried in different RRC reconfiguration messages.
  • the CHO configuration information includes configuration information for multiple fourth cells. These multiple fourth cells include the first cell.
  • the first base station before the first base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE, the first base station sends a handover request message to the base station associated with each fourth cell. Subsequently, the base station associated with the fourth cell sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station.
  • the handover request confirmation message includes the configuration information of the fourth cell, which is used by the UE to access the fourth cell. In this way, the first base station obtains the configuration information of multiple fourth cells, and thus obtains the CHO configuration information.
  • Step 805 The UE selects the first cell from multiple fourth cells based on the CHO configuration information.
  • the UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple fourth cells to obtain signal quality information of multiple fourth cells, and selects the fourth cell with better signal quality from the multiple fourth cells as the first cell based on the signal quality information of multiple fourth cells.
  • the UE may also disregard the execution triggering condition and select the first cell from multiple fourth cells, thereby avoiding the UE failing to select the first cell and affecting the stability of UE communication.
  • Step 806 The UE sends a random access request message to the second base station to request access to the first cell.
  • the second base station is associated with the first cell.
  • the base station processing operation can be performed by the CU, and the base station transmit and receive operation can be performed by the DU or RU; or, the base station processing operation can be performed by the CU-CP, and the base station transmit and receive operation can be performed by the DU or RU.
  • the CU can generate a measurement configuration, which it can then send to the DU.
  • the DU can then send the measurement configuration to the UE, or the DU can send the measurement configuration to the RU, which in turn sends it to the UE.
  • the DU can receive measurement reports from the UE, or the RU can receive measurement reports from the UE and send them to the DU. Subsequently, the DU sends the measurement reports back to the CU.
  • the CU determines the handover command message based on the measurement reports.
  • the CU-CP can generate a measurement configuration, which it can then send to the DU.
  • the DU can then send the measurement configuration to the UE, or it can send it to the RU, which in turn sends it to the UE.
  • the DU can receive measurement reports from the UE, or the RU can receive measurement reports from the UE and send them to the DU.
  • the DU then sends the measurement reports back to the CU-CP.
  • the CU-CP determines the handover command message based on the measurement reports.
  • CU, DU, RU, and CU-CP can also perform other operations, which will not be listed in this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction flow of various modules within the first base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application.
  • the DU can receive a random access request message from the UE, or the RU can receive a random access request message from the UE and send the random access request message to the DU. Subsequently, the DU sends the random access request message to the CU.
  • the DU can receive a random access request message from the UE, or the RU can receive a random access request message from the UE and send the random access request message to the DU. Subsequently, the DU sends the random access request message to the CU-CP.
  • CU, DU, RU, and CU-CP can also perform other operations, which will not be listed in this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction flow of various modules within a second base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application.
  • step numbers in the above flowcharts are merely examples of the execution flow and do not constitute a restriction on the order of step execution. In this embodiment, there is no strict execution order between steps that do not have temporal dependencies. Not all steps shown in the flowcharts are mandatory. Some steps can be deleted from the flowcharts as needed, or other possible steps can be added to the flowcharts as needed.
  • the base station and UE include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to perform each function.
  • this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application scenario and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • Figures 11 and 12 are schematic diagrams of possible communication devices provided in embodiments of this application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the UE or base station in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device can be one of the UEs 120a-120j shown in Figure 1A, or the base station 110a or 110b shown in Figure 1A, or a module (such as a chip) applied to the UE or base station.
  • the communication device 1100 includes a processing module 1101 and a transceiver module 1102.
  • the communication device 1100 is used to implement the functions of the UE or base station in the method embodiments shown in Figures 4 to 8 above.
  • the processing module 1101 is used to acquire first information, which is prediction information for indicating that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future; when a preset condition is determined to be met according to the first information, the terminal device accesses the first cell before a first time, where the first time is the predicted occurrence time of the first abnormal event; wherein, the first cell is different from the serving cell.
  • first information which is prediction information for indicating that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future
  • the processing module 1101 accesses the first cell, it is specifically configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to send a measurement report to the first access network device, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, of which the first cell is included, and the first access network device is associated with the serving cell; control the transceiver module 1102 to receive configuration information of the first cell from the first access network device; and, according to the configuration information of the first cell, switch to the first cell.
  • the processing module 1101 accesses the first cell, it is specifically used to: control the transceiver module 1102 to send second information to the second access network device; the second information is used to indicate access to the first cell, the first cell is determined by measuring the signals of multiple third cells, the multiple third cells include the first cell, and the second access network device is associated with the first cell.
  • the processing module 1101 before accessing the first cell, is further configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to receive third information from the first access network device, the third information indicating the configuration information of multiple fourth cells, and the first access network device being associated with the serving cell; when accessing the first cell, the processing module 1101 is specifically configured to: determine the first cell from the multiple fourth cells, the first cell being determined by measuring the signals of the multiple fourth cells; and switch to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell.
  • the processing module 1101 determines that the preset condition is met based on the first information, it is specifically used to: determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur in the future.
  • the processing module 1101 when the processing module 1101 determines that the preset condition is met based on the first information, it is specifically used to: determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than the first threshold.
  • the processing module 1101 determines that the preset condition is met based on the first information, it is specifically used to: determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a first threshold and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a second threshold.
  • the processing module 1101 when the processing module 1101 acquires the first information, it is specifically configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to receive fourth information from the first access network device, the fourth information being used to indicate at least one measurement item, the first access network device being associated with the serving cell; measure the reference signal of the serving cell to obtain the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item; and determine the first information based on the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item.
  • the processing module 1101 is configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to receive a measurement report, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, the measurement report being sent by the terminal device when it determines that the prediction conditions are met based on first information, the first information being prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future, and the access network device being associated with the serving cell; and control the transceiver module 1102 to send configuration information of the first cell or configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells, the first cell being one of multiple second cells, the configuration information of the first cell or the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being determined based on the measurement report; the configuration information of the first cell being used by the terminal device to access the first cell, and the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being used by the terminal device to select from one or more candidate cells and access the first cell.
  • the transceiver module 1102 when the transceiver module 1102 sends the configuration information of the first cell, it is specifically used to: send fifth information, the fifth information including the configuration information of the first cell, the fifth information being used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell; or, when the transceiver module 1102 sends the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells respectively, it is specifically used to: send sixth information, the sixth information including the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells respectively, the sixth information being used to instruct the terminal device to select the first cell from one or more candidate cells according to the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells respectively, and switch to the first cell, the one or more candidate cells including the first cell.
  • the communication device 1200 includes a processor 1210 and an interface circuit 1220.
  • the processor 1210 and the interface circuit 1220 are coupled to each other.
  • the interface circuit 1220 can be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1200 may also include a memory 1230 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1210, or storing input data required by the processor 1210 to execute instructions, or storing data generated after the processor 1210 executes instructions.
  • the processor 1210 is used to implement the function of the processing module 1101, and the interface circuit 1220 is used to implement the function of the transceiver module 1102.
  • the UE chip implements the functions of the UE in the above method embodiments.
  • the UE chip receives information from other modules in the UE (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), which is sent to the UE by the base station; or, the UE chip sends information to other modules in the UE (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), which is sent to the base station by the UE.
  • the base station module implements the functions of the base station in the above method embodiments.
  • the base station module receives information from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the base station, which is information sent by the UE to the base station; or, the base station module sends information to other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the base station, which is information sent by the base station to the UE.
  • the base station module can be the baseband chip of the base station, or it can be a DU or other modules, where the DU can be a DU under the O-RAN architecture.
  • processors in the embodiments of this application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field-programmable gate arrays
  • a general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of this application can be implemented in hardware or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • the software instructions can consist of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, registers, hard disks, portable hard disks, CD-ROMs, or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor, enabling the processor to read information from and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium can reside in an ASIC.
  • the ASIC can reside in a base station or UE.
  • the processor and storage medium can also exist as discrete components in the base station or UE.
  • implementation can be achieved, in whole or in part, through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it can be implemented, in whole or in part, as a computer program product.
  • a computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When a computer program or instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions of the embodiments of this application are performed.
  • the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transferred from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
  • a computer program or instructions can be transferred from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired or wireless means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available medium can be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, hard disk, or magnetic tape; it can also be an optical medium, such as a digital video optical disc; or it can be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid-state drive.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be a volatile or non-volatile storage medium, or a combination of both.
  • At least one means one or more, and “more than one” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist.
  • a and/or B can represent: A alone, A and B simultaneously, or B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates an “or” relationship between the preceding and following related objects; in the formulas of this application, the character “/” indicates a “division” relationship between the preceding and following related objects.
  • “Including at least one of A, B, and C” can mean: including A; including B; including C; including A and B; including A and C; including B and C; including A, B, and C.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus, which are used for improving the communication stability of a terminal device during a handover process. In the present application, the method comprises: a terminal device acquiring first information, the first information being prediction information for indicating that a first abnormal event is predicted to occur in the future between the terminal device and a serving cell; and when it is determined on the basis of the first information that a preset condition is met, the terminal device accessing a first cell before a first time, the first time being a predicted occurrence time of the first abnormal event, wherein the first cell is different from the serving cell.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and apparatus

相关申请的交叉引用Cross-reference to related applications

本申请要求在2024年5月9日提交中华人民共和国国家知识产权局、申请号为202410574520.7、发明名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 202410574520.7, filed on May 9, 2024, entitled "A Communication Method and Apparatus", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请实施例涉及无线通信领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly to a communication method and apparatus.

背景技术Background Technology

终端设备的小区切换(或称为切换)是由接入网设备进行控制的。示例性的,终端设备接入到接入网设备的小区1中,接入网设备向终端设备发送测量配置,终端设备根据测量配置测量多个小区的下行参考信号以得到多个小区的测量结果,向接入网设备发送多个小区的测量结果;接入网设备可根据多个小区的测量结果,从多个小区中选择信号质量较好的小区2,进而向终端设备发送切换命令消息,切换命令消息用于指示终端设备由小区1切换至小区2。终端设备响应于切换命令消息,由小区1切换至小区2。Cell handover (or handover) of terminal devices is controlled by access network equipment. For example, a terminal device accesses cell 1 of the access network equipment. The access network equipment sends a measurement configuration to the terminal device. The terminal device measures the downlink reference signals of multiple cells according to the measurement configuration to obtain measurement results for multiple cells, and sends these measurement results back to the access network equipment. Based on the measurement results of multiple cells, the access network equipment can select cell 2 with better signal quality from among the multiple cells, and then send a handover command message to the terminal device. The handover command message instructs the terminal device to hand over from cell 1 to cell 2. In response to the handover command message, the terminal device hands over from cell 1 to cell 2.

在上述切换流程中,若终端设备接收到的小区1的信号质量变差,导致终端设备与小区1之间发生无线链路失败(radio link failure,RLF)之前,终端设备未接收到接入网设备的切换命令消息,则终端设备需发起无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)重建立请求流程,请求接入其他小区(例如小区3)。In the above handover process, if the signal quality received by the terminal device from cell 1 deteriorates, causing a radio link failure (RLF) between the terminal device and cell 1, and the terminal device has not received a handover command message from the access network device, then the terminal device needs to initiate a radio resource control (RRC) re-establishment request process to request access to other cells (e.g., cell 3).

如此,导致终端设备通信的不稳定性。This leads to instability in the communication of terminal devices.

发明内容Summary of the Invention

本申请提供一种通信方法及装置,用于在切换流程中,提高终端设备通信的稳定性。This application provides a communication method and apparatus for improving the stability of terminal device communication during the handover process.

第一方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可由第一通信装置执行,第一通信装置可以是终端设备,或终端设备中的模块,例如芯片。进一步的,当第一通信装置是终端设备中的模块时,该模块可向终端设备中的其他模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息(例如测量报告),该测量报告是终端设备发送给接入网设备的;当然,该模块也可接收来自其他模块(如射频模块或天线)的信息(例如测量配置),该测量配置是接入网设备发送给终端设备的。为方便描述,如下以终端设备执行为例说明。Firstly, this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a first communication device, which may be a terminal device or a module within the terminal device, such as a chip. Further, when the first communication device is a module within the terminal device, the module can send information (e.g., a measurement report) to other modules within the terminal device (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement report being sent by the terminal device to an access network device; of course, the module can also receive information (e.g., a measurement configuration) from other modules (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement configuration being sent by the access network device to the terminal device. For ease of description, the following explanation uses the terminal device as an example.

方法包括:终端设备获取第一信息,第一信息为用于指示终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息(或称为推理信息);终端设备在根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,在第一时间之前接入第一小区,第一时间是预测的第一异常事件的发生时间;其中,第一小区与服务小区不同。The method includes: a terminal device acquiring first information, which is prediction information (or inference information) used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future; the terminal device accessing the first cell before a first time when it determines that a preset condition is met based on the first information, where the first time is the predicted occurrence time of the first abnormal event; wherein, the first cell is different from the serving cell.

上述技术方案中,终端设备获取终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,根据该预测信息提前接入第一小区。避免终端设备与服务小区发生RLF之前,未接收到切换命令消息(或条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)配置信息),而无法成功接入第一小区。有助于提高终端设备通信的稳定性。In the above technical solution, the terminal device obtains prediction information about the first abnormal event that will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future, and connects to the first cell in advance based on this prediction information. This avoids the terminal device failing to connect to the first cell before receiving the handover command message (or conditional handover (CHO) configuration information) before the RLF occurs between the terminal device and the serving cell. This helps improve the stability of terminal device communication.

在一个可能实现方式中,终端设备在接入第一小区时,具体可以是,终端设备向第一接入网设备发送测量报告,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息,多个第二小区中包括第一小区,第一接入网设备与服务小区关联;终端设备接收来自第一接入网设备的第一小区的配置信息;终端设备根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。In one possible implementation, when the terminal device accesses the first cell, it may specifically send a measurement report to the first access network device, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, of which the first cell is included, and the first access network device is associated with the serving cell; the terminal device receives configuration information of the first cell from the first access network device; and the terminal device switches to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell.

上述技术方案中,终端设备可通过向第一接入网设备发送测量报告的方式,触发第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一小区的配置信息,从而,终端设备能够在与服务小区发生RLF之前,切换到第一小区。In the above technical solution, the terminal device can trigger the first access network device to send configuration information of the first cell to the terminal device by sending a measurement report to the first access network device. Thus, the terminal device can switch to the first cell before an RLF occurs with the serving cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,测量报告中还包括多个第二小区分别作为终端设备切换的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。在一个可能实现方式中,第二异常事件(或称为第二异常事件的类型)包括如下一项或多项:切换失败、RLF、乒乓切换、非必要切换、切换过晚、或切换过早。In one possible implementation, the measurement report also includes prediction information of second abnormal events occurring when multiple second cells are used as target cells for terminal equipment handover. In one possible implementation, the second abnormal event (or type of second abnormal event) includes one or more of the following: handover failure, RLF, ping-pong handover, unnecessary handover, handover too late, or handover too early.

上述技术方案中,第一接入网设备在为终端设备选择目标小区/候选小区时,考虑第二小区作为终端设备切换时的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。有助于保障终端设备通信的稳定性。In the above technical solution, when the first access network device selects a target cell/candidate cell for the terminal device, it considers the prediction information of a second abnormal event that might occur when the second cell is used as the target cell for handover of the terminal device. This helps to ensure the stability of terminal device communication.

在一个可能实现方式中,测量报告中还包括第一信息。In one possible implementation, the measurement report also includes initial information.

上述技术方案中,第一接入网设备可根据测量报告中的第一信息,确定终端设备发送测量报告的原因,进而迅速为终端设备选择合适的目标小区/候选小区。In the above technical solution, the first access network device can determine the reason why the terminal device sends the measurement report based on the first information in the measurement report, and then quickly select a suitable target cell/candidate cell for the terminal device.

在一个可能实现方式中,终端设备在接入第一小区时,具体可以是,终端设备向第二接入网设备发送第二信息;第二信息用于指示接入第一小区(或,第二信息用于指示终端设备通过RRC重建立的方式接入第一小区),第一小区是针对多个第三小区的信号进行测量确定的,多个第三小区中包括第一小区,第二接入网设备与第一小区关联。第二信息例如是RRC重建立请求消息。In one possible implementation, when the terminal device accesses the first cell, it may specifically send second information to the second access network device. The second information indicates access to the first cell (or, the second information indicates access to the first cell via RRC re-establishment). The first cell is determined by measuring the signals of multiple third cells, including the first cell. The second access network device is associated with the first cell. The second information may be, for example, an RRC re-establishment request message.

上述技术方案中,终端设备可自行选择第一小区,并向与第一小区关联的第二接入网设备发起RRC重建立流程,从而,终端设备能够在与服务小区发生RLF之前,接入第一小区。In the above technical solution, the terminal device can select the first cell and initiate an RRC re-establishment process to the second access network device associated with the first cell. Thus, the terminal device can access the first cell before an RLF occurs with the serving cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,终端设备在接入第一小区之前,还接收来自第一接入网设备的第三信息(例如,CHO配置信息),第三信息指示多个第四小区的配置信息,第一接入网设备与服务小区关联。终端设备在接入第一小区时,具体可以是,终端设备从多个第四小区中确定第一小区,第一小区是针对多个第四小区的信号进行测量确定的;根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。In one possible implementation, before accessing the first cell, the terminal device also receives third information (e.g., CHO configuration information) from the first access network device. This third information indicates the configuration information of multiple fourth cells, and the first access network device is associated with the serving cell. Specifically, when accessing the first cell, the terminal device may determine the first cell from among the multiple fourth cells by measuring the signals from the multiple fourth cells; and then switch to the first cell based on its configuration information.

上述技术方案中,终端设备可自行执行CHO切换流程,从多个第四小区中选择第一小区,从而,终端设备能够在与服务小区发生RLF之前,接入第一小区。In the above technical solution, the terminal device can automatically execute the CHO handover process and select the first cell from multiple fourth cells. Thus, the terminal device can access the first cell before an RLF occurs with the serving cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,终端设备在根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,具体可以是,在第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件时,确定预设条件满足。或者还可以是,在第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定预设条件满足。或者还可以是,在第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定预设条件满足。In one possible implementation, when the terminal device determines that a preset condition is met based on the first information, it can specifically determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur in the future. Alternatively, it can determine that the preset condition is met when the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than a first threshold. Or, it can determine that the preset condition is met when the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than the first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a second threshold.

在一个可能实现方式中,第一异常事件包括RLF。In one possible implementation, the first exception event includes RLF.

其中,RLF包括如下中一项或多项:物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、无线问题计时器运行且触发测量上报时启动的计时器超时的RLF、随机接入过程失败的RLF、无线链路控制失败的RLF、检测到连续上行的先听后说失败的RLF、或接收到父节点的回传无线链路失败的RLF。RLF includes one or more of the following: RLF caused by physical layer problem causing timer timeout, RLF caused by timer timeout triggered when radio problem timer runs and triggers measurement reporting, RLF caused by random access procedure failure, RLF caused by radio link control failure, RLF caused by detection of continuous uplink READ failure, or RLF caused by receiving backhaul radio link failure from parent node.

在一个可能实现方式中,终端设备在获取第一信息时,具体可以是,终端设备接收来自第一接入网设备的第四信息,第四信息用于指示至少一个测量项。终端设备测量服务小区的参考信号,得到至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果;终端设备根据至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果,确定第一信息。在一个可能实现方式中,至少一个测量项包括:测量标识、测量对象、报告配置、或测量事件中的至少一个。In one possible implementation, when the terminal device acquires the first information, it may specifically receive fourth information from the first access network device, the fourth information indicating at least one measurement item. The terminal device measures the reference signal of the serving cell to obtain measurement results corresponding to each of the at least one measurement item; the terminal device determines the first information based on the measurement results corresponding to each of the at least one measurement item. In one possible implementation, the at least one measurement item includes at least one of: a measurement identifier, a measurement object, a report configuration, or a measurement event.

上述技术方案中,终端设备可根据第四信息,确定需要测量的至少一个测量项,进而根据至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果,确定第一信息,有助于提高终端设备确定第一信息的准确性。In the above technical solution, the terminal device can determine at least one measurement item that needs to be measured based on the fourth information, and then determine the first information based on the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item, which helps to improve the accuracy of the terminal device in determining the first information.

第二方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可由第二通信装置执行,第二通信装置可以是接入网设备,或接入网设备中的模块,例如芯片。进一步的,当第二通信装置是接入网设备中的模块时,该模块可向接入网设备中的其他模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息(例如测量配置),该测量配置是接入网设备发送给终端设备的;当然,该模块也可接收来自其他模块(如射频模块或天线)的信息(例如测量报告),该测量报告是终端设备发送给接入网设备的。为方便描述,如下以接入网设备执行为例说明。Secondly, this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a second communication device. The second communication device can be an access network device or a module within the access network device, such as a chip. Further, when the second communication device is a module within the access network device, the module can send information (e.g., measurement configuration) to other modules within the access network device (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement configuration being sent by the access network device to a terminal device; of course, the module can also receive information (e.g., a measurement report) from other modules (e.g., an RF module or an antenna), the measurement report being sent by the terminal device to the access network device. For ease of description, the following explanation uses an access network device as an example.

方法包括:接入网设备(或第一接入网设备)接收测量报告,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息,测量报告是终端设备在根据第一信息确定预测条件满足时发送的,第一信息为用于指示终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,接入网设备与服务小区关联;接入网设备发送第一小区的配置信息或一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,第一小区为多个第二小区中的一个小区,第一小区的配置信息或一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息是根据测量报告确定的;第一小区的配置信息用于终端设备接入到第一小区,一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息用于终端设备从一个或多个候选小区中选择并接入到第一小区。The method includes: an access network device (or a first access network device) receiving a measurement report, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, the measurement report being sent by a terminal device when it determines that a prediction condition is met based on first information, the first information being prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future, the access network device being associated with the serving cell; the access network device sending configuration information of the first cell or configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells, the first cell being one of multiple second cells, the configuration information of the first cell or the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being determined based on the measurement report; the configuration information of the first cell being used by the terminal device to access the first cell, and the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being used by the terminal device to select from one or more candidate cells and access the first cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,接入网设备在发送第一小区的配置信息时,具体可以是,接入网设备发送第五信息,第五信息包括第一小区的配置信息,第五信息用于指示终端设备根据第一小区的配置信息切换到第一小区。第五信息例如是切换命令消息,相当于携带reconfigurationWithSync字段的RRC重配置消息。In one possible implementation, when the access network device sends the configuration information of the first cell, it may specifically send fifth information. This fifth information includes the configuration information of the first cell and is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first cell based on that configuration information. The fifth information could be, for example, a handover command message, equivalent to an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the `reconfigurationWithSync` field.

或者,接入网设备在发送一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息时,具体可以是,接入网设备发送第六信息,第六信息包括一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,第六信息用于指示终端设备根据一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,从一个或多个候选小区中选择第一小区,并切换到第一小区。第六信息例如是CHO配置信息,例如,CHO配置信息携带于RRC重配置消息中。Alternatively, when the access network device sends configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells, specifically, the access network device sends sixth information. This sixth information includes configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells. The sixth information instructs the terminal device to select a first cell from the one or more candidate cells based on the configuration information corresponding to each candidate cell, and then switch to the first cell. The sixth information could be, for example, CHO configuration information, which is carried in the RRC reconfiguration message.

在一个可能实现方式中,测量报告中还包括多个第二小区分别作为终端设备切换的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。在一个可能实现方式中,第二异常事件包括如下一项或多项:切换失败、RLF、乒乓切换、非必要切换、切换过晚、或切换过早。In one possible implementation, the measurement report also includes prediction information of second abnormal events occurring when multiple second cells are used as target cells for terminal equipment handover. In one possible implementation, the second abnormal event includes one or more of the following: handover failure, RLF, ping-pong handover, unnecessary handover, handover too late, or handover too early.

在一个可能实现方式中,测量报告中还包括第一信息。In one possible implementation, the measurement report also includes initial information.

在一个可能实现方式中,第一异常事件包括RLF。In one possible implementation, the first exception event includes RLF.

其中,RLF包括如下中一项或多项:物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、无线问题计时器运行且触发测量上报时启动的计时器超时的RLF、随机接入过程失败的RLF、无线链路控制失败的RLF、检测到连续上行的先听后说失败的RLF、或接收到父节点的回传无线链路失败的RLF。RLF includes one or more of the following: RLF caused by physical layer problem causing timer timeout, RLF caused by timer timeout triggered when radio problem timer runs and triggers measurement reporting, RLF caused by random access procedure failure, RLF caused by radio link control failure, RLF caused by detection of continuous uplink READ failure, or RLF caused by receiving backhaul radio link failure from parent node.

第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该装置具有实现上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中终端设备的功能,该装置可以为终端设备,也可以为终端设备中包括的芯片。Thirdly, embodiments of this application provide a communication device that has the function of implementing the terminal device in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect. The device can be a terminal device or a chip included in the terminal device.

该通信装置也可以具有实现上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中接入网设备的功能,该装置可以为接入网设备,也可以为接入网设备中包括的芯片。The communication device may also have the function of an access network device in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect described above. The device may be an access network device or a chip included in the access network device.

上述通信装置的功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现,硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元或手段(means)。The functions of the aforementioned communication device can be implemented by hardware or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules, units, or means corresponding to the aforementioned functions.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该装置的结构中包括处理模块和收发模块,处理模块被配置为支持该装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种实现方式中终端设备相应的功能,或者执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种实现方式中接入网设备相应的功能。收发模块用于支持该装置与其他通信设备之间的通信,例如该装置为终端设备时,可接收来自接入网设备的测量配置。该通信装置还可以包括存储模块,存储模块与处理模块耦合,其保存有装置必要的程序指令和数据。作为一种示例,处理模块可以为处理器,通信模块可以为收发器,存储模块可以为存储器,存储器可以和处理器集成在一起,也可以和处理器分离设置。In one possible implementation, the device includes a processing module and a transceiver module. The processing module is configured to support the device in performing the functions of a terminal device as described in the first aspect or any implementation thereof, or in performing the functions of an access network device as described in the second aspect or any implementation thereof. The transceiver module supports communication between the device and other communication devices; for example, when the device is a terminal device, it can receive measurement configurations from the access network device. The communication device may also include a storage module coupled to the processing module, which stores necessary program instructions and data for the device. As an example, the processing module may be a processor, the communication module may be a transceiver, and the storage module may be a memory. The memory may be integrated with the processor or separated from it.

在另一种可能的实现方式中,该装置的结构中包括处理器,还可以包括存储器。处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序指令,以使装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法,或者执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。可选地,该装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。当装置为接入网设备或终端设备时,该通信接口可以是收发器或输入/输出接口;当该装置为接入网设备中包含的芯片或终端设备中包含的芯片时,该通信接口可以是芯片的输入/输出接口。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路,输入/输出接口可以是输入/输出电路。In another possible implementation, the device includes a processor and may also include a memory. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute computer program instructions stored in the memory to cause the device to perform the methods in the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, or to perform the methods in the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof. Optionally, the device also includes a communication interface, with the processor coupled to the communication interface. When the device is an access network device or a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface; when the device is a chip included in an access network device or a chip included in a terminal device, the communication interface may be the chip's input/output interface. Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, and the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.

第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统,包括:处理器和存储器,处理器与存储器耦合,存储器用于存储程序或指令,当程序或指令被处理器执行时,使得该芯片系统实现上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法,或实现上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。Fourthly, embodiments of this application provide a chip system, including: a processor and a memory, the processor being coupled to the memory, the memory being used to store programs or instructions, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor, causing the chip system to implement the methods in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or to implement the methods in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.

可选地,该芯片系统还包括接口电路,该接口电路用于交互代码指令至处理器。Optionally, the chip system also includes an interface circuit for exchanging code instructions with the processor.

可选地,该芯片系统中的处理器可以为一个或多个,该处理器可以通过硬件实现也可以通过软件实现。当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现。Optionally, the chip system may include one or more processors, which can be implemented in hardware or software. When implemented in hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc. When implemented in software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor that reads software code stored in memory.

可选地,该芯片系统中的存储器也可以为一个或多个。该存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,也可以和处理器分离设置。示例性的,存储器可以是非瞬时性处理器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上。Optionally, the chip system may contain one or more memories. These memories may be integrated with the processor or disposed separately. For example, the memory may be a non-transitory processor, such as read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated with the processor on the same chip or disposed on separate chips.

第五方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,使得该通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。Fifthly, this application provides a computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program or instructions that, when executed by a communication device, cause the communication device to perform the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, or cause the communication device to perform the method of the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.

第六方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,实现上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者实现上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。Sixthly, this application provides a computer program product comprising a computer program or instructions that, when executed by a communication device, implement the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, or implement the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.

第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括接入网设备和至少一个终端设备。终端设备用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,接入网设备用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, embodiments of this application provide a communication system including an access network device and at least one terminal device. The terminal device is used to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation thereof, and the access network device is used to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation thereof.

上述第二方面至第七方面中任一方面可以达到的技术效果可以参照上述第一方面中有益效果的描述,此处不再重复赘述。The technical effects that can be achieved by any of the second to seventh aspects mentioned above can be referred to the description of the beneficial effects in the first aspect mentioned above, and will not be repeated here.

附图说明Attached Figure Description

图1A为一种通信系统架构示意图;Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture;

图1B为一种CU和DU功能的示意图;Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the functions of a CU and a DU;

图2为AI模型的一种应用架构示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an application architecture for an AI model;

图3为一种传统切换的流程示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a traditional switching process;

图4为本申请示例性提供的通信方法的流程示意图;Figure 4 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method exemplarily provided in this application;

图5为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第一个具体场景中的流程示意图;Figure 5 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a first specific scenario;

图6为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第二个具体场景中的流程示意图;Figure 6 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a second specific scenario;

图7为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第三个具体场景中的流程示意图;Figure 7 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a third specific scenario;

图8为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第四个具体场景中的流程示意图;Figure 8 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided by this application in a fourth specific scenario;

图9为本申请示例性提供的一种O-RAN场景中第一基站内各模块的交互的流程示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction between modules within a first base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application;

图10为本申请示例性提供的一种O-RAN场景中第二基站内各模块的交互的流程示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction between modules within a second base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application;

图11为本申请示例性提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by example in this application;

图12为本申请示例性提供的再一种通信装置的结构示意图。Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided by example in this application.

具体实施方式Detailed Implementation

下面先对本申请实施例所涉及的相关技术特征进行解释说明。需要说明的是,这些解释是为了让本申请实施例更容易被理解,而不应该视为对本申请所要求的保护范围的限定。The relevant technical features involved in the embodiments of this application will be explained below. It should be noted that these explanations are for the purpose of making the embodiments of this application easier to understand, and should not be regarded as a limitation on the scope of protection claimed by this application.

一、通信系统的架构I. Architecture of the Communication System

基于上述说明,如图1A为一种通信系统的架构示意图。Based on the above description, Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system.

该通信系统包括无线接入网100和核心网200,可选的,通信系统还可以包括互联网300。The communication system includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200. Optionally, the communication system may also include an Internet 300.

其中,无线接入网100可以包括至少一个无线接入网设备(如图1A中的110a和110b),还可以包括至少一个终端设备(如图1A中的120a-120j)。终端设备通过无线的方式与无线接入网设备相连,无线接入网设备通过无线或有线方式与核心网连接。核心网设备与无线接入网设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备,也可以是将核心网设备的功能与无线接入网设备的逻辑功能集成在同一个物理设备上,还可以是一个物理设备上集成了部分核心网设备的功能和部分的无线接入网设备的功能。终端设备和终端设备之间,以及无线接入网设备和无线接入网设备之间,可以通过有线或无线的方式相互连接。图1A只是示意图,该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备,如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备,在图1A中未画出。The wireless access network 100 may include at least one wireless access network device (110a and 110b in Figure 1A) and at least one terminal device (120a-120j in Figure 1A). The terminal devices are connected wirelessly to the wireless access network devices, and the wireless access network devices are connected to the core network wirelessly or via a wired connection. The core network devices and the wireless access network devices may be independent physical devices, or the functions of the core network devices and the logical functions of the wireless access network devices may be integrated into the same physical device, or a single physical device may integrate some of the functions of the core network devices and some of the functions of the wireless access network devices. Terminal devices and wireless access network devices can be interconnected via wired or wireless connections. Figure 1A is only a schematic diagram; this communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in Figure 1A.

无线接入网设备可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、第六代(6th generation,6G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站、未来移动通信系统中的基站或无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入节点等。无线接入网设备可以是宏基站(如图1A中的110a),也可以是微基站或室内站(如图1A中的110b),还可以是中继节点或施主节点等。Wireless access network equipment can be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next-generation NodeB (gNB) in a 5G mobile communication system, a next-generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, or an access node in a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) system, etc. Wireless access network equipment can be a macro base station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110a), a micro base station or an indoor station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110b), or a relay node or donor node, etc.

在另一种可能的场景中,由多个无线接入网设备协作协助终端设备实现无线接入,不同无线接入网设备分别实现部分功能。例如,无线接入网设备可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如,包括在基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如,包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。CU和DU之间通过F1接口连接;DU和RU之间可通过前传接口连接。In another possible scenario, multiple wireless access network (UART) devices collaborate to assist terminal devices in achieving wireless access, with each UART device performing a specific function. For example, the UART devices can be a central unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU). The CU and DU can be separate entities or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU). The RU can be included in radio frequency (RF) devices or RF units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH). The CU and DU are connected via an F1 interface; the DU and RU are connected via a fronthaul interface.

在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在开放式无线电接入网(open radio access network,O-RAN)系统中,CU也可以称为O-CU(开放式CU),DU也可以称为O-DU,CU-CP也可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP也可以称为O-CU-UP,RU也可以称为O-RU。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU, or RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning. For example, in an open radio access network (O-RAN) system, CU can also be called O-CU (open CU), DU can also be called O-DU, CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP, and RU can also be called O-RU. Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software modules and hardware modules.

示例性的,如图1B为一种CU和DU功能的示意图,CU用于实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、以及业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层和其他控制功能;DU用于实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层(PHY)的高层(靠近MAC层)。物理层的高层功能包括以下一项或多项:前馈纠错编码/解码、加扰/解扰、或调制/解调。For example, Figure 1B illustrates the functions of a CU and DU. The CU implements the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer, the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer, the Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer, and other control functions. The DU implements the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, the Media Access Control (MAC) layer, and higher layers of the Physical Layer (PHY) (closest to the MAC layer). Higher-layer functions of the Physical Layer include one or more of the following: feedforward error correction coding/decoding, scrambling/descrambling, or modulation/demodulation.

本申请的实施例对无线接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology or device form used in the wireless access network equipment.

终端设备也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端设备等。终端设备可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。Terminal devices can also be called terminals, user equipment (UE), mobile stations, mobile terminal devices, etc. They can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), the Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grids, smart furniture, smart offices, smart wearables, smart transportation, and smart cities. Terminal devices can include mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, and smart home devices.

本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology or device form used in the terminal device.

接入网设备和终端设备可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。接入网设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对接入网设备和终端设备的应用场景不做限定。Access network equipment and terminal equipment can be fixed or mobile. They can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; and they can be deployed in the air on aircraft, balloons, and satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of the access network equipment and terminal equipment.

接入网设备和终端设备的角色可以是相对的,例如,图1A中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动接入网设备,对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端设备120j来说,终端设备120i是接入网设备;但对于接入网设备110a来说,120i是终端设备,即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,110a与120i之间也可以是通过接入网设备与接入网设备之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于110a来说,120i也是接入网设备。因此,接入网设备和终端设备都可以统一称为通信装置,图1A中的110a和110b可以称为具有接入网设备功能的通信装置,图1A中的120a-120j可以称为具有终端设备功能的通信装置。The roles of access network devices and terminal devices can be relative. For example, the helicopter or drone 120i in Figure 1A can be configured as a mobile access network device. For terminal devices 120j that access the wireless access network 100 via 120i, terminal device 120i is an access network device; however, for access network device 110a, 120i is a terminal device. That is, 110a and 120i communicate via a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, 110a and 120i can also communicate via an interface protocol between access network devices. In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also an access network device. Therefore, both access network devices and terminal devices can be collectively referred to as communication devices. 110a and 110b in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with access network device functions, and 120a-120j in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with terminal device functions.

接入网设备和终端设备之间、接入网设备和接入网设备之间、终端设备和终端设备之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信;可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。Communication between access network devices and terminal devices, between access network devices, and between terminal devices can be conducted using licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, or both simultaneously. Communication can be conducted using spectrum below 6 GHz, spectrum above 6 GHz, or both simultaneously. The embodiments of this application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.

在本申请的实施例中,接入网设备的功能也可以由接入网设备中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有接入网设备功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有接入网设备功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述应用场景中的控制中心。终端设备的功能也可以由终端设备中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端设备功能的装置来执行。In the embodiments of this application, the functions of the access network device can be executed by modules (such as chips) within the access network device, or by a control subsystem that includes the functions of the access network device. This control subsystem, including the functions of the access network device, can be a control center in the aforementioned application scenarios such as smart grids, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart cities. Similarly, the functions of the terminal device can be executed by modules (such as chips or modems) within the terminal device, or by a device that includes the functions of the terminal device.

在本申请中,接入网设备向终端设备发送下行信号或下行信息,下行信息承载在下行信道上;终端设备向接入网设备发送上行信号或上行信息,上行信息承载在上行信道上。终端设备为了与接入网设备进行通信,需要与接入网设备控制的小区建立无线连接。与终端设备建立了无线连接的小区称为该终端设备的服务小区。当终端设备与该服务小区进行通信的时候,还会受到来自邻区的信号的干扰。In this application, the access network device sends downlink signals or downlink information to the terminal device, with the downlink information carried on the downlink channel; the terminal device sends uplink signals or uplink information to the access network device, with the uplink information carried on the uplink channel. To communicate with the access network device, the terminal device needs to establish a radio connection with the cell controlled by the access network device. The cell with which the terminal device has established a radio connection is called the serving cell of the terminal device. When the terminal device communicates with this serving cell, it is also subject to interference from signals from neighboring cells.

为了便于描述,下文以基站作为无线接入网设备的例子,以UE作为终端设备的例子进行描述。For ease of description, the following description uses the base station as an example of a wireless access network device and the UE as an example of a terminal device.

二、模型II. Model

模型例如是人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)模型或机器学习(machine learning,ML)模型。The model is, for example, an artificial intelligence (AI) model or a machine learning (ML) model.

如图2所示,为AI模型的一种应用架构示意图。数据源(data source)用于存储训练数据和推理数据。AI模型训练节点(model training host)通过对数据源提供的训练数据(training data)进行分析或训练,得到AI模型,且将AI模型部署在AI模型推理节点(model inference host)中。可选的,AI模型训练节点还可以对已部署在AI模型推理节点的AI模型进行更新。AI模型推理节点还可以向AI模型训练节点反馈已部署AI模型的相关信息,以使得AI模型训练节点对已部署的AI模型进行优化或更新等。Figure 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of an AI model application architecture. The data source stores training and inference data. The AI model training host analyzes or trains the AI model using the training data provided by the data source and deploys the AI model on the AI model inference host. Optionally, the AI model training host can also update the AI model already deployed on the AI model inference host. The AI model inference host can also feed back relevant information about the deployed AI model to the AI model training host, enabling the training host to optimize or update the deployed AI model.

其中,通过AI模型训练节点学习得到AI模型,相当于由AI模型训练节点利用训练数据学习得到AI模型的输入和输出之间的映射关系。AI模型推理节点使用AI模型,基于数据源提供的推理数据进行推理,得到推理结果。该方法还可以描述为:AI模型推理节点将推理数据输入到AI模型,通过AI模型得到输出,该输出即为推理结果。In this process, the AI model is learned through the AI model training nodes, which essentially learn the mapping relationship between the AI model's input and output using training data. The AI model inference nodes use the AI model to perform inference based on the inference data provided by the data source, and obtain the inference result. This method can also be described as follows: the AI model inference nodes input the inference data into the AI model, and the AI model outputs the inference result.

该推理结果可以指示:由执行对象使用(执行)的配置参数、和/或由执行对象执行的操作。推理结果可以由执行(actor)实体统一规划,并发送给一个或多个执行对象(例如,网络实体)去执行。可选的,执行实体或者执行对象可以将其收集到的参数或测量量反馈给数据源,该过程可以称为表现反馈,所反馈的参数可以作为训练数据或推理数据。可选的,执行实体或者执行对象还可以根据AI模型推理节点所输出的推理结果,确定AI模型性能相关的反馈信息,且将该反馈信息反馈给AI模型推理节点,AI模型推理节点可根据该反馈信息,向AI模型训练节点反馈该AI模型的性能信息等,以使得AI模型训练节点对已部署的AI模型进行优化或更新等,该过程可称为AI模型反馈。The inference result can indicate the configuration parameters used (executed) by the executing object, and/or the operations performed by the executing object. The inference result can be uniformly planned by the actor entity and sent to one or more executing objects (e.g., network entities) for execution. Optionally, the executing entity or executing object can feed back the parameters or measurements it collects to the data source; this process can be called performance feedback, and the fed-back parameters can serve as training data or inference data. Optionally, the executing entity or executing object can also determine AI model performance-related feedback information based on the inference result output by the AI model inference node, and feed this feedback information back to the AI model inference node. The AI model inference node can then use this feedback information to feed back the AI model's performance information to the AI model training node, enabling the AI model training node to optimize or update the deployed AI model; this process can be called AI model feedback.

三、测量和测量配置III. Measurement and Measurement Configuration

连接态测量一般用于切换准备过程中的小区选择。Connectivity-state measurements are generally used for cell selection during the handover preparation process.

基站给UE下发测量配置后,UE根据测量配置中指示的测量对象、上报配置等参数,侦测邻区的信号状态变化。测量配置一般通过RRC重配置(RRC reconfiguration)消息传递。UE根据测量配置的内容进行相关的测量,将测量结果通过测量报告发送给基站。After the base station sends the measurement configuration to the UE, the UE detects changes in the signal status of neighboring cells based on the measurement objects and reporting configuration parameters indicated in the measurement configuration. The measurement configuration is generally transmitted via RRC reconfiguration messages. The UE performs relevant measurements according to the content of the measurement configuration and sends the measurement results to the base station through a measurement report.

测量配置中包括测量对象(measurement object)、报告配置、测量标识(measurement identities)、测量量配置、测量间隔(gap)配置。其中,测量标识可关联测量对象和报告配置。The measurement configuration includes the measurement object, report configuration, measurement identities, measurement quantity configuration, and measurement interval configuration. The measurement identity can be associated with both the measurement object and the report configuration.

1、测量对象1. Measurement object

测量对象包括同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)子载波间隔、基于SSB的测量定时配置(SSB-based measurement timing configuration,SMTC)、白名单小区和黑名单小区等。其中,白名单小区也可以称为被允许小区(allowed cell);黑名单小区也可以称为被排除小区(excluded cell)。网络可以配置具体的待测量小区列表,即黑名单小区列表和白名单小区列表。针对列入黑名单的小区,UE不再对其进行事件测量和测量上报。而白名单小区是该测量频点上UE会进行事件测量和测量上报的小区。The measurement objects include the subcarrier spacing of the synchronization signal block (SSB), the SSB-based measurement timing configuration (SMTC), whitelisted cells, and blacklisted cells. Whitelisted cells can also be called allowed cells; blacklisted cells can also be called excluded cells. The network can configure specific lists of cells to be measured, namely blacklisted cell lists and whitelisted cell lists. For cells on the blacklist, the UE will no longer perform event measurements or report measurements. Whitelisted cells are those on the measurement frequency that the UE will perform event measurements and report measurements on.

2、报告配置2. Report Configuration

报告配置表示触发UE上报测量报告的标准和测量报告的格式。示例性的,测量报告是基于信号(例如SSB或者信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS))测量的结果。每个上报配置拥有单独的标识(可称为是报告配置标识)。The report configuration specifies the criteria and format that trigger the UE to report measurement reports. For example, the measurement report is based on measurements of signals such as SSB or Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS). Each reporting configuration has a unique identifier (which may be referred to as the report configuration identifier).

UE在上报测量报告时,具体可以是,事件触发上报和周期触发上报。其中,事件触发上报配置包括各种测量事件(如表1所示)及门限值,在通常情况下,UE需要在确定迟滞时间(TimeToTrigger)内持续满足测量上报的进入条件才会触发测量上报。周期触发上报配置包括上报周期等。When a UE reports a measurement report, it can do so through either event-triggered reporting or periodic-triggered reporting. Event-triggered reporting configuration includes various measurement events (as shown in Table 1) and threshold values. Under normal circumstances, the UE needs to continuously meet the entry conditions for measurement reporting within a defined hysteresis time (TimeToTrigger) before triggering a measurement report. Periodic-triggered reporting configuration includes the reporting period, etc.

表1

Table 1

上述表1中,相关变量的具体含义如下:The specific meanings of the relevant variables in Table 1 above are as follows:

Ms、Mn分别表示服务小区、邻区的测量结果;Ms and Mn represent the measurement results of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, respectively;

Hys表示测量结果的幅度迟滞;Hys indicates amplitude hysteresis in the measurement result;

TimeToTrigger表示持续满足事件进入条件的时长,即时间迟滞;TimeToTrigger represents the duration for which the event entry condition is continuously met, i.e., time delay;

Thresh、Thresh1、Thresh2表示门限值;Thresh, Thresh1, and Thresh2 represent threshold values;

Ofs、Ofn分别表示服务小区、邻区的频率偏置;Ofs and Ofn represent the frequency offset of the serving cell and the neighboring cell, respectively.

Ocs、Ocn分别表示服务小区、邻区的小区偏移量(cell individual offset,CIO);Ocs and Ocn represent the cell individual offset (CIO) of the serving cell and neighboring cell, respectively.

Off表示测量结果的偏置。Off indicates the bias of the measurement result.

其中,信号质量可通过如下四个参数中的一项或多项来表示:Signal quality can be represented by one or more of the following four parameters:

(1)参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power,RSRP),用于反映参考信号的接收强度。(1) Reference signal received power (RSRP) is used to reflect the received strength of the reference signal.

(2)接收信号强度(received signal strength indication,RSSI),用于反映当前信道的总信号强度。(2) Received signal strength indication (RSSI) is used to reflect the total signal strength of the current channel.

(3)参考信号接收质量(reference signal received quality,RSRQ),用于反映当前信道质量的信噪比和干扰水平,近似于RSRP与RSSI的比值。(3) Reference signal received quality (RSRQ) is used to reflect the signal-to-noise ratio and interference level of the current channel quality, and is approximately the ratio of RSRP to RSSI.

(4)信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference and noise ratio,SINR),用于反映当前信道的信干比,是衡量UE性能的一个重要指标。(4) Signal to interference and noise ratio (SINR) is used to reflect the signal-to-interference ratio of the current channel and is an important indicator for measuring UE performance.

当事件使用不同的信号质量作为触发条件对应的触发量时,上述事件中的测量结果为对应测量到的触发量结果。When different signal qualities are used as the triggering conditions for an event, the measurement results in the above event are the corresponding measured triggering results.

3、测量标识3. Measurement markings

测量标识用于将测量对象与测量配置联合起来。如果UE达到了测量开启门限,UE会根据测量标识的有无,判断是否进行该种测量。当UE向基站发送测量报告时,仅表明测量标识即可,基站可以根据测量标识找到对应的测量对象标识和报告配置标识,进而判断是什么事件的测量报告。基站可以通过配置多个测量标识,将多个测量对象链接到相同的报告配置,也可以将多个报告配置链接到相同的测量对象。Measurement identifiers are used to associate measurement objects with measurement configurations. If a UE reaches a measurement activation threshold, it determines whether to perform the measurement based on the presence or absence of a measurement identifier. When a UE sends a measurement report to the base station, it only needs to indicate the measurement identifier. The base station can then use the measurement identifier to find the corresponding measurement object identifier and report configuration identifier, and thus determine what event the measurement report refers to. The base station can configure multiple measurement identifiers to link multiple measurement objects to the same report configuration, or multiple report configurations to the same measurement object.

四、切换(handover,HO)IV. Handover (HO)

切换(又可称为是小区切换)是指UE从源小区(source cell)到目标小区(target cell)的无线链路连接的迁移。切换包括传统切换和条件切换(conditional handover,CHO),如下分别说明:Handover (also known as cell handover) refers to the migration of the radio link connection of a UE from a source cell to a target cell. Handover includes traditional handover and conditional handover (CHO), which are explained below:

本申请中,可将用于管理源小区的基站称为是源基站,用于管理目标小区的基站称为是目标基站,用于管理候选小区的基站称为是候选基站,用于管理服务小区的基站称为是服务基站。其中,用于管理小区的基站,又可认为是,小区所属的基站,覆盖该小区的基站,与该小区相关联(对应的)的基站等。In this application, the base station used to manage the source cell is referred to as the source base station, the base station used to manage the target cell is referred to as the target base station, the base station used to manage the candidate cell is referred to as the candidate base station, and the base station used to manage the serving cell is referred to as the serving base station. The base station used to manage the cell can also be considered as the base station to which the cell belongs, the base station covering the cell, or the base station associated with (corresponding to) the cell, etc.

进一步的,当源小区和目标小区是由同一个基站管理时,源基站和目标基站相同;当源小区和候选小区是由同一个基站管理时,源基站和候选基站相同等。Furthermore, when the source cell and the target cell are managed by the same base station, the source base station and the target base station are the same; when the source cell and the candidate cell are managed by the same base station, the source base station and the candidate base station are the same, and so on.

1、传统切换1. Traditional switching

源基站向UE发送切换命令消息(具体可以是,携带reconfigurationWithSync字段(或称为信元(information element,IE))的RRC重配置消息),切换命令消息用于指示UE切换到哪个目标小区以及如何进行切换。示例性的,切换命令消息中包括目标小区的标识信息和配置信息。UE释放与源小区之间的连接,停止与源小区的数据传输,以及,接入到目标小区。在传统切换场景中,切换命令消息的成功发送是保证成功切换的必要条件。其中,小区的标识信息例如是小区的索引、小区的标识(物理小区标识(physical cell identifier,PCI)、小区全球标识(cell global identifier,CGI)等)。The source base station sends a handover command message to the UE (specifically, an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field (or information element, IE)). This handover command message instructs the UE which target cell to hand over to and how to perform the handover. For example, the handover command message includes the target cell's identification information and configuration information. The UE releases the connection with the source cell, stops data transmission with the source cell, and then accesses the target cell. In traditional handover scenarios, successful transmission of the handover command message is a necessary condition for a successful handover. The cell identification information includes, for example, the cell index and cell identifier (physical cell identifier (PCI), cell global identifier (CGI), etc.).

如图3为一种传统切换的流程示意图:Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a traditional switching process:

步骤301,源基站向目标基站发送切换请求(handover request)消息。Step 301: The source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.

步骤302,目标基站执行许可控制,例如是,目标基站为UE分配如下信息中一项或多项:小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI)、用于UE接入目标小区时所需要的随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)资源,RACH资源可以是专用RACH资源或公共RACH资源。Step 302: The target base station performs permission control, for example, the target base station allocates one or more of the following information to the UE: cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), random access channel (RACH) resources required for the UE to access the target cell, the RACH resources can be dedicated RACH resources or public RACH resources.

步骤303,目标基站向源基站发送切换请求确认(handover request acknowledge)消息。Step 303: The target base station sends a handover request acknowledgement message to the source base station.

切换请求确认消息中包括目标基站在执行许可控制之后生成的目标小区的配置信息,目标小区的配置信息中包括目标小区的参数配置和/或资源配置,参数配置具体可以是RRC参数配置,参数配置中可包括为UE生成的C-RNTI,资源配置例如是资源的位置,资源中包括专用RACH资源和/或公用RACH资源。The handover request confirmation message includes the target cell configuration information generated by the target base station after performing permission control. The target cell configuration information includes the target cell parameter configuration and/or resource configuration. The parameter configuration may specifically be RRC parameter configuration, which may include the C-RNTI generated for the UE. The resource configuration may be the location of resources, which may include dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources.

步骤304,源基站向UE发送RRC重配置消息(也即是切换命令消息)。Step 304: The source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message (i.e., a handover command message) to the UE.

RRC重配置消息中包括目标小区的标识信息和配置信息。The RRC reconfiguration message includes the target cell's identification and configuration information.

步骤305,UE向目标基站发送随机接入请求消息。示例性的,UE根据目标小区的标识信息和配置信息,向目标基站发送随机接入请求消息,以请求接入到目标小区中。Step 305: The UE sends a random access request message to the target base station. For example, the UE sends a random access request message to the target base station based on the target cell's identification information and configuration information to request access to the target cell.

步骤306,UE向目标基站发送RRC重配置完成(RRC reconfiguration complete)消息。Step 306: The UE sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target base station.

2、CHO2. CHO

CHO相比于传统切换,能够提升切换成功率。Compared to traditional switching, CHO can improve the success rate of switching.

源基站在源基站与UE之间的通信链路质量较好时,向UE发送CHO配置信息(具体可以包括在RRC重配置消息中)。CHO配置信息中包括一个或者多个候选小区的配置信息和执行触发条件等。UE在接收到该CHO配置信息后,不会立刻向任何一个候选小区发起执行切换的动作,而是会继续保持和源小区的连接与数据传输。进一步的,UE在候选小区中找到满足执行触发条件的候选小区后,自主决定切换至该候选小区(此时,该候选小区又可称为是目标小区)。When the communication link between the source base station and the UE is of good quality, the source base station sends CHO configuration information to the UE (which may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message). The CHO configuration information includes configuration information and execution trigger conditions for one or more candidate cells. After receiving the CHO configuration information, the UE will not immediately initiate a handover to any candidate cell, but will continue to maintain the connection and data transmission with the source cell. Furthermore, after finding a candidate cell that meets the execution trigger conditions, the UE will autonomously decide to handover to that candidate cell (at this time, the candidate cell can also be referred to as the target cell).

CHO的流程与图3类似,区别在于源基站需要向候选基站发送切换请求消息,接收来自候选基站的候选小区的配置信息,以及,源基站向UE发送CHO配置信息时,CHO配置信息中包括候选小区的配置信息。进而UE在选择某个候选小区作为目标小区时,可以根据该候选小区的配置信息,切换至该候选小区。The CHO process is similar to that shown in Figure 3, except that the source base station needs to send a handover request message to the candidate base station, receive the configuration information of the candidate cell from the candidate base station, and when the source base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE, the CHO configuration information includes the configuration information of the candidate cell. Therefore, when the UE selects a candidate cell as the target cell, it can handover to that candidate cell based on its configuration information.

五、基于测量的切换机制V. Measurement-based switching mechanism

在传统切换场景中,UE接收来自源基站的测量配置,UE根据测量配置,测量多个邻区的信号,以得到多个邻区的测量结果。UE在确定邻区的测量结果满足上述上报条件(事件触发上报或周期触发上报)时,将该邻区的测量结果通过测量报告发送给源基站,源基站基于UE上报的测量结果进行切换决策,以确定目标小区和目标基站,向目标基站请求目标小区的配置信息。目标基站向源基站发送目标小区的配置信息。源基站向UE发送切换命令消息,切换命令消息包括目标小区的配置信息。In traditional handover scenarios, the UE receives measurement configuration from the source base station. Based on this configuration, the UE measures signals from multiple neighboring cells to obtain measurement results. When the UE determines that the measurement results of a neighboring cell meet the aforementioned reporting conditions (event-triggered reporting or periodic-triggered reporting), it sends the neighboring cell's measurement results to the source base station via a measurement report. The source base station makes a handover decision based on the measurement results reported by the UE to determine the target cell and target base station, and requests the target cell's configuration information from the target base station. The target base station then sends the target cell's configuration information to the source base station. Finally, the source base station sends a handover command message to the UE, which includes the target cell's configuration information.

在CHO场景中,源基站提前将CHO配置信息发送给UE,UE在确定某个候选小区的测量结果满足了某个测量事件的进入门限,并持续了一段时间(例如,迟滞时间之后,将该候选小区作为目标小区进行切换。其中,该触发条件对应于上述测量报告的上报条件或者候选小区的执行触发条件)。In the CHO scenario, the source base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE in advance. The UE determines that the measurement result of a candidate cell meets the entry threshold of a certain measurement event and continues for a period of time (e.g., after a hysteresis time), and then uses the candidate cell as the target cell for handover. Here, the triggering condition corresponds to the reporting condition of the aforementioned measurement report or the execution triggering condition of the candidate cell.

六、载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)VI. Carrier aggregation (CA)

CA技术用于将2个或更多的载波单元(component carrier,CC)聚合在一起以支持更大的传输带宽。例如,最大可以为100兆赫(mega hertz,MHz),每个载波单元的带宽可以为5MHz、10MHz、15MHz和20MHz等。CA技术中涉及到主小区(primary cell,PCell)和辅小区(secondary cell,SCell)。其中,主小区是UE进行初始连接建立时的小区,或进行RRC连接重建时的小区,或是在切换过程中指定的主小区;主小区对应的载波单元称为主载波单元(primary component carrier PCC)。辅小区是在RRC重配置时添加的,用于提供额外的无线资源。辅小区对应的载波单元称为辅载波单元(secondary component carrier,SCC)。CA (Carrier Aggregator) technology is used to aggregate two or more component carriers (CCs) to support greater transmission bandwidth. For example, the maximum bandwidth can be 100 MHz, and the bandwidth of each carrier unit can be 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz. CA technology involves primary cells (PCells) and secondary cells (SCells). The primary cell is the cell used when the UE initially establishes a connection, or when re-establishing a connection via RRC (Reconnection Reconfiguration), or the primary cell designated during handover; the carrier unit corresponding to the primary cell is called the primary component carrier (PCC). Secondary cells are added during RRC reconfiguration to provide additional radio resources. The carrier unit corresponding to the secondary cell is called the secondary component carrier (SCC).

在传统切换场景中,若UE接收到的服务小区的信号质量变差,导致UE与服务小区之间发生RLF之前,UE未接收到切换命令消息;或者,在CHO场景中,若UE接收到的服务小区的信号质量变差,导致UE与服务小区之间发生RLF之前,UE未接收到CHO配置信息,则UE需发起RRC重建立请求流程,请求接入其他小区。如此,导致UE通信的不稳定性。In traditional handover scenarios, if the signal quality of the serving cell received by the UE deteriorates, causing an RLF (Recurrent Link Request) between the UE and the serving cell, the UE may not receive a handover command message beforehand. Alternatively, in CHO (Confirmation of Hazard) scenarios, if the signal quality of the serving cell received by the UE deteriorates, causing an RLF between the UE and the serving cell, the UE may not receive CHO configuration information beforehand. In such cases, the UE must initiate an RRC (Re-establishment Call) procedure to request access to another cell. This leads to instability in UE communication.

为此,本申请提供一种通信方法,用于提高UE通信的稳定性。Therefore, this application provides a communication method to improve the stability of UE communication.

如图4为本申请示例性提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图:Figure 4 is a flowchart illustrating a communication method provided by this application:

步骤401,UE获取第一信息。Step 401, the UE obtains the first information.

第一信息为用于指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息。其中,UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,又可称为是,服务小区(将来,或即将)发生第一异常事件的预测信息,服务小区的预测信息,服务小区对应的预测信息等,当然还可以有其他名称,本申请不限定。The first information is prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future. This prediction information can also be referred to as prediction information of a first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell (in the future or soon), prediction information of the serving cell, prediction information corresponding to the serving cell, etc., and may have other names, which are not limited in this application.

其中,服务小区可以是一个或多个。The service area can be one or more.

示例性的,在CA场景中,服务小区为多个(例如,包括一个主小区和一个或多个辅小区),第一信息可用于指示UE分别与每个服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,或者,第一信息可用于指示UE与主小区(相当于一个服务小区)将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息。在非CA场景中,服务小区为一个。For example, in a CA scenario, there are multiple serving cells (e.g., including one primary cell and one or more secondary cells). The first information can be used to indicate the predicted information of a first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and each serving cell in the future, or the first information can be used to indicate the predicted information of a first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the primary cell (equivalent to a serving cell). In a non-CA scenario, there is one serving cell.

本申请中,在UE由服务小区切换到第一小区(具体可参见下述步骤402中的描述)的情况下,服务小区又可认为是源小区,第一小区又可认为是目标小区。“预测信息”还可称为是“推理信息”,“预测”还可称为是“推理”。当然“预测信息”和“预测”也可分别有其他的名称,本申请不限定。In this application, when the UE switches from the serving cell to the first cell (see the description in step 402 below), the serving cell can be considered as the source cell, and the first cell can be considered as the target cell. "Prediction information" can also be called "inference information," and "prediction" can also be called "inference." Of course, "prediction information" and "prediction" can have other names, and this application is not limited to any of them.

其中,第一异常事件至少包括RLF和/或第一HOF。The first abnormal event includes at least RLF and/or the first HOF.

RLF至少包括以下一种或多种:RLF includes at least one or more of the following:

(1)物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF。(1) Physical layer issues cause RLF timeouts.

比如,当UE的RRC层从物理层收到连续的n个小区的失步指示之后,或者,UE确定信号质量(例如信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI),信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference and noise ratio,SINR))小于预设阈值时,启动无线问题计时器(例如5G中的T310),且在无线问题计时器超时时,RRC层仍没有从物理层收到连续的m个小区的同步指示,其中,n和m为正整数。此外,如果在无线问题计时器超时之前,UE的RRC层从物理层接收到m个小区的同步指示,则UE停止该无线问题计时器。其中,小区例如是主小区。For example, when the UE's RRC layer receives n consecutive out-of-synchronization indications from the physical layer, or when the UE determines that the signal quality (e.g., channel quality indicator (CQI) or signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR)) is less than a preset threshold, a radio problem timer (e.g., T310 in 5G) is started. If the RRC layer still has not received m consecutive synchronization indications from the physical layer by the time the radio problem timer expires, where n and m are positive integers. Furthermore, if the UE's RRC layer receives m synchronization indications from the physical layer before the radio problem timer expires, the UE stops the radio problem timer. Here, the cells are, for example, the primary cell.

(2)在无线问题计时器(例如5G中的T310)运行,且触发测量上报时启动的计时器(例如5G中的T312)超时的RLF。(2) RLF that runs on a wireless problem timer (e.g., T310 in 5G) and timed out when a timer (e.g., T312 in 5G) that was started when the measurement was reported.

(3)随机接入过程失败的RLF。例如,在小区组进行的随机接入过程失败,小区组例如是主小区组。(3) RLF for a failed random access procedure. For example, a random access procedure fails in a cell group, such as the primary cell group.

(4)无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)失败的RLF。例如,UE的RRC层从小区组的RLC层收到最大重传次数达到的指示信息,小区组例如是主小区组。(4) Radio link control (RLC) failure RLF. For example, the UE's RRC layer receives an indication from the RLC layer of the cell group that the maximum number of retransmissions has been reached, such as the primary cell group.

(5)检测到连续上行的先听后说(listen before talk,LBT)失败的RLF。(5) Detected consecutive uplink listen before talk (LBT) failures of RLF.

(6)针对接入回传一体化移动终端(integrated access and backhaul mobile termination,IAB MT),接收到父节点的回传无线链路失败(back hual radio link failure,BH RLF)的RLF。(6) For integrated access and backhaul mobile termination (IAB MT), the backhaul radio link failure (BH RLF) received from the parent node.

第一HOF至少包括以下一种或多种:The first HOF includes at least one or more of the following:

(1)UE在满足测量事件进入条件到UE成功接收到源小区的切换命令消息(比如,携带reconfigurationWithSync字段的RRC重配置消息)的第一时间段内,发生RLF(例如,源小区发生RLF)。(1) Within the first time period from when the UE meets the measurement event entry condition to when the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field), an RLF occurs (e.g., an RLF occurs in the source cell).

其中,UE确定满足测量事件进入条件的时间点是时间点1,UE成功接收到源小区的切换命令消息的时间点是时间点2,该第一时间段具体是时间点1至时间点2之间的时间段。Among them, the time point at which the UE determines that the measurement event entry condition is met is time point 1, and the time point at which the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell is time point 2. The first time period is specifically the time period between time point 1 and time point 2.

(2)UE在满足测量事件进入条件到UE成功接收到源小区的切换命令消息(比如,携带reconfigurationWithSync字段的RRC重配置消息)的第一时间段内,检测到物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)失败(例如,检测到源小区的PDCCH失败)。(2) Within the first time period from when the measurement event entry condition is met to when the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field), the UE detects a failure of the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) (e.g., detects a failure of the PDCCH of the source cell).

第一时间段的定义参见上述第一HOF中的(1)。The definition of the first time period is given in (1) of the first HOF above.

当然,RLF中还可包括其他的RLF,本申请不限定RLF的具体定义。同理,第一HOF中还可包括其他的切换失败方式,本申请不限定第一HOF的具体定义。Of course, the RLF may also include other RLFs, and this application does not limit the specific definition of the RLF. Similarly, the first HOF may also include other handover failure modes, and this application does not limit the specific definition of the first HOF.

第一信息可以有如下三种方式:The first information can be presented in the following three ways:

方式1,第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率。进一步的,当第一异常事件是多个时,第一信息中包括发生每个第一异常事件的概率。Method 1: The first information includes the probability that a first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future. Furthermore, when there are multiple first abnormal events, the first information includes the probability of each first abnormal event occurring.

例如,第一异常事件是RLF中的物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF,第一信息中包括{物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、发生概率30%}。再例如,第一异常事件是RLF中的物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF和随机接入过程失败的RLF,第一信息中包括{物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、发生概率30%}和{随机接入过程失败的RLF、发生概率20%}。For example, the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, and the first information includes {RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30%}. As another example, the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout and an RLF where the random access procedure fails, and the first information includes {RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30%} and {RLF where the random access procedure fails, probability of occurrence 20%}.

其中,发生第一异常事件的概率又可称为是发生第一异常事件的可能性、发生第一异常事件的准确率等。本申请对具体名称不限定。The probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be referred to as the likelihood of the first abnormal event occurring, the accuracy of the occurrence of the first abnormal event, etc. This application does not limit the specific names.

此外,第一信息中还可包括UE与服务小区将来发生每个第一异常事件的开始时间和/或结束时间。In addition, the first information may also include the start time and/or end time of each first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

方式2,第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率和发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率(可简称为是,概率的准确率)。进一步的,当第一异常事件是多个时,第一信息中包括发生每个第一异常事件的概率和发生该第一异常事件的概率的准确率。Method 2: The first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring in the UE and the serving cell in the future, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring (which can be simply referred to as the probability accuracy). Furthermore, when there are multiple first abnormal events, the first information includes the probability of each first abnormal event occurring and the accuracy of the probability of that first abnormal event occurring.

例如,第一异常事件是RLF中的物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF,第一信息中包括{物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、发生概率30%、准确率90%}。再例如,第一异常事件是RLF中的物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF和随机接入过程失败的RLF,第一信息中包括{物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、发生概率30%、准确率90%}和{随机接入过程失败的RLF、发生概率20%、准确率90%}。For example, the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout. The first information includes {RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30%, accuracy 90%}. As another example, the first anomalous event is an RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout and an RLF where the random access procedure fails. The first information includes {RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer timeout, probability of occurrence 30%, accuracy 90%} and {RLF where the random access procedure fails, probability of occurrence 20%, accuracy 90%}.

其中,发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率又可称为是发生第一异常事件的概率的准确性等。本申请对具体名称不限定。The accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be referred to as the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring, etc. This application does not limit the specific name.

需要补充的是,发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率,例如是,发生第一异常事件的概率是90%,该90%的准确率是80%;再例如是,发生第一异常事件的概率是10%,该10%的准确率是80%等。“发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率”与前述的“发生第一异常事件的准确率”需要区分,“发生第一异常事件的准确率”是“发生第一异常事件的概率”,“发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率”还可认为是“发生第一异常事件的准确率的准确率”。进一步的,发生第一异常事件的概率是100%,相当于第一异常事件100%发生;发生第一异常事件的概率是0%,相当于第一异常事件100%不发生;该第一异常事件的100%发生或不发生又各自对应于准确率,可将该准确率转换为发生第一异常事件的概率,例如,第一异常事件100%发生的准确率是90%,那么还可认为发生第一异常事件的概率是90%,第一异常事件100%不发生的准确率是90%,那么还可认为发生第一异常事件的概率是10%(或不发生第一异常事件的概率是90%)。It's important to clarify that the accuracy rate of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring is different from the aforementioned "accuracy rate of the first anomalous event." "Accuracy rate of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring" refers to the probability of the first anomalous event occurring, while "accuracy rate of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring" can also be considered the "accuracy rate of the accuracy rate of the first anomalous event." Furthermore, a 100% probability of the first abnormal event occurring is equivalent to the first abnormal event occurring 100% of the time; a 0% probability of the first abnormal event occurring is equivalent to the first abnormal event not occurring 100% of the time. The 100% occurrence or non-occurrence of the first abnormal event corresponds to an accuracy rate, which can be converted into the probability of the first abnormal event occurring. For example, if the accuracy rate of the first abnormal event occurring 100% of the time is 90%, then the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be considered to be 90%. If the accuracy rate of the first abnormal event not occurring 100% of the time is 90%, then the probability of the first abnormal event occurring can also be considered to be 10% (or the probability of the first abnormal event not occurring is 90%).

服务小区发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率由UE使用的模型确定。The accuracy of the probability of the first anomalous event occurring in the serving cell is determined by the model used by the UE.

一个可能示例中,UE中包括一个或多个模型,每个模型对应于各自的准确率,当UE基于某个模型确定服务小区发生第一异常事件的概率时,服务小区发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率是该模型对应的准确率。例如,UE中包括模型1和模型2,模型1对应于准确率1,模型2对应于准确率2,当UE基于模型1确定服务小区发生第一异常事件的概率时,准确率是准确率1;当UE基于模型2确定服务小区发生第一异常事件的概率时,准确率是准确率2。In one possible example, the UE includes one or more models, each corresponding to its own accuracy rate. When the UE determines the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell based on a certain model, the accuracy rate of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell is the accuracy rate corresponding to that model. For example, the UE includes model 1 and model 2, where model 1 corresponds to accuracy rate 1 and model 2 corresponds to accuracy rate 2. When the UE determines the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell based on model 1, the accuracy rate is accuracy rate 1; when the UE determines the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell based on model 2, the accuracy rate is accuracy rate 2.

又一个可能示例中,模型可用于UE确定服务小区发生不同第一异常事件的概率,且模型在预测发生不同第一异常事件的概率时的准确率可能不同。例如,模型用于确定服务小区发生异常事件1至异常事件7的概率,且发生异常事件1至异常事件7的概率的准确率分别是准确率1至准确率7。In another possible example, the model can be used by the UE to determine the probability of different first anomalous events occurring in the serving cell, and the model's accuracy in predicting the probability of different first anomalous events may differ. For example, the model is used to determine the probability of anomalous events 1 through 7 occurring in the serving cell, and the accuracy rates for the probabilities of anomalous events 1 through 7 are accuracy rates 1 through 7, respectively.

此外,第一信息中还可包括UE与服务小区将来发生每个第一异常事件的开始时间和/或结束时间。In addition, the first information may also include the start time and/or end time of each first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

方式3,第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来是否发生第一异常事件。Method 3: The first information includes whether the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future.

例如,第一信息中包括指示信息,该指示信息占用1个比特,当该比特取值为0时,指示UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件;当该比特取值为0时,指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件。For example, the first information includes indication information, which occupies 1 bit. When the value of this bit is 0, it indicates that the UE and the serving cell will not experience the first abnormal event in the future; when the value of this bit is 0, it indicates that the UE and the serving cell will experience the first abnormal event in the future.

例子3-1,第一异常事件是一个或多个,该指示信息与服务小区对应的,该指示信息用于指示该服务小区是否能够继续作为UE的服务小区。解释为,当指示信息用于指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件时,相当于,该服务小区不能够继续作为UE的服务小区,UE需要执行后续步骤402的动作;当指示信息用于指示UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件时,相当于,该服务小区能够继续作为UE的服务小区,UE可以无需执行后续步骤402的动作。Example 3-1: The first abnormal event is one or more, and the indication information corresponds to the serving cell. This indication information is used to indicate whether the serving cell can continue to serve as the UE's serving cell. This can be interpreted as follows: when the indication information indicates that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it is equivalent to the serving cell being unable to continue serving as the UE's serving cell, and the UE needs to perform the subsequent step 402; when the indication information indicates that the first abnormal event will not occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it is equivalent to the serving cell being able to continue serving as the UE's serving cell, and the UE does not need to perform the subsequent step 402.

例子3-2,第一异常事件是一个或多个,当第一异常事件是多个时,每个第一异常事件对应于各自的指示信息,即用于指示每个第一异常事件是否发生。例如,第一异常事件包括RLF中的物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF和随机接入过程失败的RLF,第一信息中包括{物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、指示信息等于1},{随机接入过程失败的RLF、指示信息等于0}。此外,第一信息中还可包括每个第一异常事件的开始时间和/或第一异常事件的结束时间。Example 3-2: There are one or more first abnormal events. When there are multiple first abnormal events, each first abnormal event corresponds to its own indication information, that is, it is used to indicate whether each first abnormal event has occurred. For example, the first abnormal events include RLFs where a physical layer problem causes a timer to time out and RLFs where a random access procedure fails. The first information includes {RLF where a physical layer problem causes a timer to time out, indication information equals 1}, {RLF where a random access procedure fails, indication information equals 0}. In addition, the first information may also include the start time and/or the end time of each first abnormal event.

在一个可能方式中,UE自行确定第一信息。示例性的,UE中包括模型(例如AI模型),UE根据模型,确定第一信息。又示例性的,UE中包括预设算法,UE根据预设算法,确定第一信息。此外,UE还可根据预测系统或其他方式,确定第一信息。为方便描述,如下均以模型为例说明。In one possible approach, the UE determines the first information itself. For example, the UE includes a model (e.g., an AI model), and the UE determines the first information based on the model. Another example is that the UE includes a preset algorithm, and the UE determines the first information based on the preset algorithm. Furthermore, the UE may also determine the first information based on a prediction system or other methods. For ease of description, the following explanation uses a model as an example.

UE在确定第一信息时,具体可以是,UE将如下参数中一项或多项输入到模型中:服务小区的测量结果、UE的移动信息(例如移动速度、移动方向、地理位置)、其他UE确定的其他UE与该服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息、服务小区的历史异常事件信息。When determining the first information, the UE may input one or more of the following parameters into the model: the measurement results of the serving cell, the UE's movement information (e.g., movement speed, movement direction, geographical location), prediction information of other UEs and the serving cell in the future occurrence of the first abnormal event, and historical abnormal event information of the serving cell.

相应的,UE获得模型输出的第一信息,第一信息可以是上述方式1至方式3中的任一个方式。Accordingly, the UE obtains the first information output by the model, which can be any one of the above methods 1 to 3.

或者,模型输出的是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率,UE再根据UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率和第一阈值,确定第一信息,其中,第一信息可以是上述方式3。例如,当UE确定UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件;当UE确定UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率小于或等于第一阈值时,确定第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件。Alternatively, the model outputs the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future. The UE then determines the first information based on the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell and a first threshold. The first information can be method 3 described above. For example, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than the first threshold, the first information is determined to include the possibility of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future; when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first information is determined to include the possibility that a first abnormal event will not occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

又或者,模型输出的是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率和概率的准确率,UE再根据UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率、概率的准确率、第一阈值和第二阈值,确定第一信息,其中,第一信息可以是上述方式3。例如,当UE确定UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件;当UE确定UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率小于或等于第一阈值时,和/或,概率的准确率小于或等于第二阈值时,确定第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件。Alternatively, the model outputs the probability and accuracy of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future. The UE then determines the first information based on the probability, accuracy, first threshold, and second threshold of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future. The first information can be as described in method 3 above. For example, when the UE determines that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than the first threshold and the accuracy of the probability is greater than the second threshold, the first information is determined to include the occurrence of the first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future. When the UE determines that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or the accuracy of the probability is less than or equal to the second threshold, the first information is determined to include the absence of the first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

其中,第一阈值又可称为是可能性阈值、概率阈值、准确率阈值等,第二阈值又可称为是准确率阈值等,本申请对具体名称不限定。The first threshold can also be called the possibility threshold, probability threshold, accuracy threshold, etc., and the second threshold can also be called the accuracy threshold, etc. This application does not limit the specific names.

其中,第一阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。The configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.

当第一阈值的配置粒度基于模型的配置确定时,具体可以有如下两个示例:When the configuration granularity of the first threshold is determined based on the model configuration, there are two specific examples:

示例1,UE中包括一个或多个模型,该一个或多个模型均对应于同一个第一阈值。例如,UE中包括模型1至模型5,模型1至模型5均对应于同一个第一阈值1。Example 1: The UE includes one or more models, all of which correspond to the same first threshold. For example, the UE includes models 1 to 5, all of which correspond to the same first threshold 1.

示例2,UE中包括多个模型,该多个模型中的一个或多个模型对应于一个第一阈值,例如,UE中包括模型1至模型5,模型1至模型5分别对应于第一阈值1至第一阈值5;或者,模型1至模型3分别对应于第一阈值1至第一阈值3,且模型4和模型5共同对应于第一阈值4。Example 2: The UE includes multiple models, one or more of which correspond to a first threshold. For example, the UE includes models 1 to 5, which correspond to first thresholds 1 to 5 respectively; or, models 1 to 3 correspond to first thresholds 1 to 3 respectively, and models 4 and 5 together correspond to first threshold 4.

当第一阈值的配置粒度基于测量配置确定时,具体可以有如下两个示例:When the configuration granularity of the first threshold is determined based on the measurement configuration, there are two specific examples:

示例3,UE接收来自第一基站(又可称为是服务基站,也即是第一接入网设备)的测量配置,测量配置中包括一个或多个测量标识,该一个或多个测量标识均对应于同一个第一阈值。例如,测量配置中包括测量标识1至测量标识5,测量标识1至测量标识5均对应于同一个第一阈值1。Example 3: The UE receives a measurement configuration from a first base station (also known as a serving base station, or the first access network device). The measurement configuration includes one or more measurement identifiers, each corresponding to the same first threshold. For example, the measurement configuration includes measurement identifiers 1 to 5, each corresponding to the same first threshold 1.

示例4,UE接收来自第一基站的测量配置,测量配置中包括多个测量标识,该多个测量标识中的一个或多个测量标识对应于一个第一阈值。例如,UE中包括测量标识1至测量标识5,测量标识1至测量标识5分别对应于第一阈值1至第一阈值5;或者,测量标识1至测量标识3分别对应于第一阈值1至第一阈值3,且测量标识4和测量标识5共同对应于第一阈值4。Example 4: The UE receives a measurement configuration from a first base station. The measurement configuration includes multiple measurement identifiers, one or more of which correspond to a first threshold. For example, the UE includes measurement identifiers 1 to 5, which correspond to first thresholds 1 to 5 respectively; or, measurement identifiers 1 to 3 correspond to first thresholds 1 to 3 respectively, and measurement identifiers 4 and 5 together correspond to first threshold 4.

可以理解的是,在上述第一阈值的配置粒度基于测量配置确定的场景中,还可将“测量标识”替换为“测量对象”、“报告配置”或“测量事件”,也可以将“测量标识”替换为“测量标识”、“测量对象”、“报告配置”或“测量事件”中的任多个组合。It is understandable that in the scenario where the configuration granularity of the first threshold is determined based on the measurement configuration, "measurement identifier" can be replaced with "measurement object", "report configuration" or "measurement event", or "measurement identifier" can be replaced with any combination of "measurement identifier", "measurement object", "report configuration" or "measurement event".

为方便描述,如下均以一个第一阈值为例说明,也即是,不同模型、不同测量标识、不同测量对象、不同测量报告、不同测量事件等均对应于同一个第一阈值。该第一阈值例如是60%。For ease of description, the following explanation uses a single first threshold as an example. That is, different models, different measurement identifiers, different measurement objects, different measurement reports, and different measurement events all correspond to the same first threshold. This first threshold is, for example, 60%.

其中,第二阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。The configuration granularity of the second threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration.

当第二阈值的配置粒度基于模型的配置确定时,具体可以有如下两个示例:When the configuration granularity of the second threshold is determined based on the model configuration, there are two specific examples:

示例(1),UE中包括一个或多个模型,该一个或多个模型均对应于同一个第二阈值,具体举例可参见上述示例1。Example (1): The UE includes one or more models, all of which correspond to the same second threshold. For a specific example, please refer to Example 1 above.

示例(2),UE中包括多个模型,该多个模型中的一个或多个模型对应于一个第二阈值,具体举例可参见上述示例2。Example (2): The UE includes multiple models, one or more of which correspond to a second threshold. For a specific example, please refer to Example 2 above.

当第二阈值的配置粒度基于测量配置确定时,具体可以有如下两个示例:When the configuration granularity of the second threshold is determined based on the measurement configuration, there are two specific examples:

示例(3),UE接收来自第一基站的测量配置,测量配置中包括一个或多个测量标识,该一个或多个测量标识均对应于同一个第二阈值,具体举例可参见上述示例3。Example (3): The UE receives a measurement configuration from the first base station. The measurement configuration includes one or more measurement identifiers, all of which correspond to the same second threshold. For a specific example, please refer to Example 3 above.

示例(4),UE接收来自第一基站的测量配置,测量配置中包括多个测量标识,该多个测量标识中的一个或多个测量标识对应于一个第二阈值,具体举例可参见上述示例4。Example (4): The UE receives a measurement configuration from the first base station. The measurement configuration includes multiple measurement identifiers, one or more of which correspond to a second threshold. For a specific example, please refer to Example 4 above.

可以理解的是,在上述第二阈值的配置粒度基于测量配置确定的场景中,还可将“测量标识”替换为“测量对象”、“报告配置”或“测量事件”,也可以将“测量标识”替换为“测量标识”、“测量对象”、“报告配置”或“测量事件”中的任多个组合。It is understandable that in scenarios where the configuration granularity of the second threshold is determined based on the measurement configuration, "measurement identifier" can be replaced with "measurement object", "report configuration" or "measurement event", or "measurement identifier" can be replaced with any combination of "measurement identifier", "measurement object", "report configuration" or "measurement event".

为方便描述,如下均以一个第二阈值为例说明,也即是,不同模型、不同测量标识、不同测量对象、不同测量报告、不同测量事件等均对应于同一个第二阈值。该第二阈值例如是90%。For ease of description, the following explanation uses a single second threshold as an example. That is, different models, different measurement identifiers, different measurement objects, different measurement reports, and different measurement events all correspond to the same second threshold. This second threshold is, for example, 90%.

示例性的,UE中还可预配置或者预定义有第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息。又示例性的,UE中还可从第一基站中获得第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息。For example, the UE may also pre-configure or pre-define first indication information and/or second indication information. As another example, the UE may also obtain the first indication information and/or second indication information from the first base station.

其中,第一指示信息用于指示上述第一异常事件(或第一异常事件的类型(type))具体有哪些。The first indication information is used to indicate what the first abnormal event (or the type of the first abnormal event) specifically is.

在一个可能方式中,第一指示信息中包括UE需要预测的第一异常事件的标识,例如,第一指示信息中包括物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、随机接入过程失败的RLF、检测到LBT失败的RLF三个异常事件的标识,那么第一异常事件包括物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、随机接入过程失败的RLF、检测到LBT失败的RLF。In one possible approach, the first indication information includes an identifier of a first abnormal event that the UE needs to predict. For example, if the first indication information includes identifiers of three abnormal events: a physical layer problem causing a timer timeout, a random access procedure failure, and an LBT failure detection, then the first abnormal event includes the physical layer problem causing a timer timeout, the random access procedure failure, and the LBT failure detection.

再一个可能方式中,第一指示信息包括多个异常事件的标识和该多个异常事件对应的指示信息,指示信息用于UE确定是否预测该异常事件。例如,指示信息是1个比特,当该比特取值为0时,UE确定不预测该异常事件;当该比特取值为1时,UE确定预测该异常事件。再例如,第一指示信息中包括{物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF的标识,1}、{随机接入过程失败的RLF的标识,1}、{检测到LBT失败的RLF的标识,1}、{BH RLF的标识,0},那么,第一异常事件包括物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF、随机接入过程失败的RLF、检测到LBT失败的RLF。In another possible approach, the first indication information includes identifiers of multiple abnormal events and corresponding indication information for those abnormal events. The indication information is used by the UE to determine whether to predict the abnormal event. For example, the indication information is one bit; when the bit is 0, the UE determines not to predict the abnormal event; when the bit is 1, the UE determines to predict the abnormal event. As another example, if the first indication information includes {identifier of RLF causing timer timeout due to physical layer problem, 1}, {identifier of RLF causing random access procedure failure, 1}, {identifier of RLF detecting LBT failure, 1}, and {identifier of BH RLF, 0}, then the first abnormal event includes RLF causing timer timeout due to physical layer problem, RLF causing random access procedure failure, and RLF detecting LBT failure.

一个示例中,模型可根据第一指示信息指示的第一异常事件,确定第一信息中包括哪些异常事件的概率(或概率和概率的准确率,或异常事件是否发生)。再一个示例中,UE根据第一指示信息,从模型输出的多个异常事件的概率(或概率和概率的准确率,或异常事件是否发生)中,确定第一信息。In one example, the model can determine the probabilities (or probabilities and their accuracy, or whether an abnormal event has occurred) of which abnormal events are included in the first information based on the first abnormal event indicated by the first indication information. In another example, the UE determines the first information from the probabilities (or probabilities and their accuracy, or whether an abnormal event has occurred) of multiple abnormal events output by the model based on the first indication information.

第二指示信息用于指示至少一个测量项。其中,至少一个测量项包括:测量标识、测量对象、报告配置、或测量事件中的至少一个。The second indication information is used to indicate at least one measurement item. The at least one measurement item includes at least one of: a measurement identifier, a measurement object, a report configuration, or a measurement event.

UE能够根据第二指示信息,测量服务小区的参考信号,得到至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果。随后,UE能够根据至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果,确定第一信息。例如,UE将至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果(即作为服务小区的测量结果)输入到模型中,模型输出第一信息,或UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率,或UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率和概率的准确率。The UE can measure the reference signal of the serving cell according to the second indication information to obtain the measurement results corresponding to at least one measurement item. Subsequently, the UE can determine first information based on the measurement results corresponding to at least one measurement item. For example, the UE inputs the measurement results corresponding to at least one measurement item (i.e., as the measurement results of the serving cell) into the model, and the model outputs the first information, or the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future and the accuracy of the probability.

在又一个可能方式中,UE从其他设备中获得第一信息。其中,其他设备例如是其他UE等。In another possible approach, the UE obtains the first information from other devices. These other devices could be, for example, other UEs.

步骤402,UE在根据第一信息,确定第一预设条件满足时,在第一时间之前接入第一小区,第一时间是根据UE预测的第一异常事件的发生时间确定的。其中,第一小区与服务小区不同。In step 402, when the UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information, it accesses the first cell before a first time. The first time is determined based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event predicted by the UE. Here, the first cell is different from the serving cell.

如下分两种情况解释说明UE根据第一信息,确定第一预设条件满足:The following explains how the UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information, in two scenarios:

情况一,在服务小区是一个时,或者,在服务小区是多个且第一信息用于指示UE与主小区(即一个服务小区)将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息时,具体可以有如下示例一至示例三:Scenario 1, when there is only one serving cell, or when there are multiple serving cells and the first information is used to indicate the predicted information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the primary cell (i.e., one serving cell) in the future, can be illustrated by the following examples 1 to 3:

示例一,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件时,确定第一预设条件满足。Example 1: When the UE determines that the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.

此外,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件时,确定第一预设条件不满足。示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件。示例性的,第一信息中包括指示信息,指示信息用于指示UE与服务小区将来是否发生第一异常事件(例如上述方式3)。Furthermore, when the UE determines that the first information indicates that the UE and the serving cell will not experience a first abnormal event in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is not met. For example, the first preset condition is that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future. For example, the first information includes indication information used to indicate whether the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future (e.g., method 3 described above).

需要补充的是,当第一异常事件为多个时,可以有如下两种例子:It should be added that when there are multiple first exception events, there are two possible examples:

例子a,(对应于上述例子3-1),第一信息中包括指示信息,该指示信息与服务小区对应的,该指示信息用于指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件时,确定第一预设条件满足。Example a (corresponding to Example 3-1 above), the first information includes indication information, which corresponds to the serving cell. This indication information is used to indicate that when the UE and the serving cell experience a first abnormal event in the future, the first preset condition is met.

例子b,(对应于上述例子3-2),第一信息中包括多个第一异常事件各自对应的指示信息,每个第一异常事件对应的指示信息用于指示该第一异常事件是否发生。进一步的,当UE确定大于或等于预设占比1的第一异常事件将来发生时,确定第一预设条件满足;否则,确定第一预设条件不满足。例如,第一异常事件为3个(记为第一异常事件1至第一异常事件3),预设占比1是50%,第一信息指示第一异常事件1发生,第一异常事件2发生,第一异常事件3不发生,则UE确定第一预设条件满足。此外,预设占比1还可替换为预设数量1,示例性的,预设数量1等于0,也即是,当第一信息指示有一个或多个第一异常事件将来会发生时,则确定第一预设条件满足。当然,还有其他方式,本申请不限定。Example b (corresponding to Example 3-2 above): The first information includes indication information corresponding to multiple first abnormal events, and the indication information corresponding to each first abnormal event is used to indicate whether the first abnormal event has occurred. Further, when the UE determines that a first abnormal event greater than or equal to a preset percentage of 1 will occur in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met; otherwise, it determines that the first preset condition is not met. For example, if there are 3 first abnormal events (denoted as first abnormal event 1 to first abnormal event 3), the preset percentage of 1 is 50%, and the first information indicates that first abnormal event 1 occurs, first abnormal event 2 occurs, and first abnormal event 3 does not occur, then the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. In addition, the preset percentage of 1 can also be replaced with a preset quantity of 1. For example, the preset quantity of 1 is equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that one or more first abnormal events will occur in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met. Of course, there are other methods, which are not limited in this application.

示例二,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。此外,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率小于或等于第一阈值时,确定第一预设条件不满足。Example 2: When the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than a first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. Conversely, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, as indicated by the first information, is less than or equal to the first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.

示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值。本申请还可将“大于”替换为“大于或等于”,以及将对应的“小于或等于”替换为“小于”。示例性的,第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率(例如上述方式1)。For example, the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold. This application may also replace "greater than" with "greater than or equal to", and the corresponding "less than or equal to" with "less than". For example, the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future (e.g., method 1 above).

又示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件。也即是,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值(例如上述方式1)时,相当于,确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件,于是确定第一预设条件满足。UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率小于或等于第一阈值时,相当于,确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件,于是确定第一预设条件不满足。For example, the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future. That is, when the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold (e.g., in method 1 above), it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and thus determining that the first preset condition is met. When the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the first abnormal event will not occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and thus determining that the first preset condition is not met.

需要补充的是,当第一异常事件为多个时,第一信息中包括多个第一异常事件各自对应的概率。进一步的,当UE确定大于或等于预设占比2的第一异常事件对应的概率大于第一阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足;否则,确定第一预设条件不满足。例如,第一异常事件为3个(记为第一异常事件1至第一异常事件3),预设占比2是50%,第一阈值是60%,第一信息指示发生第一异常事件1的概率是90%,发生第一异常事件2的概率是90%,发生第一异常事件3的概率是20%,则UE确定第一预设条件满足。此外,预设占比2还可替换为预设数量2,示例性的,预设数量2等于0,也即是,当第一信息指示有一个或多个第一异常事件的发生概率大于第一阈值时,则确定第一预设条件满足。还有其他方式,本申请不限定。It should be added that when there are multiple first abnormal events, the first information includes the probability corresponding to each of the multiple first abnormal events. Furthermore, when the UE determines that the probability corresponding to a first abnormal event greater than or equal to a preset percentage 2 is greater than a first threshold, it determines that the first preset condition is met; otherwise, it determines that the first preset condition is not met. For example, if there are three first abnormal events (denoted as first abnormal event 1 to first abnormal event 3), the preset percentage 2 is 50%, the first threshold is 60%, and the first information indicates that the probability of first abnormal event 1 occurring is 90%, the probability of first abnormal event 2 occurring is 90%, and the probability of first abnormal event 3 occurring is 20%, then the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. In addition, the preset percentage 2 can also be replaced with a preset quantity 2. For example, the preset quantity 2 is equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that the probability of one or more first abnormal events occurring is greater than the first threshold, it determines that the first preset condition is met. There are other methods as well, which are not limited in this application.

其中,第一阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第一阈值的说明可参见上述“UE确定第一信息”相关实施例中的说明。The configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration. For an explanation of the first threshold, please refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiments related to "UE determining first information".

示例三,UE在确定在第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。Example 3: When the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, as indicated by the first information, is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.

此外,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率小于或等于第一阈值时,和/或,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率小于或等于第二阈值,确定第一预设条件不满足。Furthermore, when the UE determines that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to a first threshold, and/or when the accuracy of the UE in determining the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is less than or equal to a second threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.

示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值。本申请还可将“大于”替换为“大于或等于”,以及将对应的“小于或等于”替换为“小于”。示例性的,第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率和发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率(例如上述方式2)。For example, the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold. This application may also replace "greater than" with "greater than or equal to", and the corresponding "less than or equal to" with "less than". For example, the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring (e.g., method 2 above).

又示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件。也即是,UE在确定在第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值(例如上述方式2)时,相当于,确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件,于是确定第一预设条件满足。UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率小于或等于第一阈值时,和/或,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率小于或等于第二阈值时,相当于,确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来不发生第一异常事件,于是确定第一预设条件不满足。For example, the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future. That is, when the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the UE and the serving cell experiencing a first abnormal event in the future is greater than a second threshold (e.g., in method 2 above), it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future, and thus the first preset condition is satisfied. When the UE determines that the probability of the first information indicating that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or when the UE determines that the accuracy of the probability of the first information indicating that the UE and the serving cell will experience a first abnormal event in the future is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is equivalent to determining that the first information indicates that the UE and the serving cell will not experience a first abnormal event in the future, and thus the first preset condition is not satisfied.

需要补充的是,当第一异常事件为多个时,第一信息中包括多个第一异常事件各自对应的概率和概率的准确率。进一步的,当UE确定大于或等于预设占比3的第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且这些概率中大于或等于预设占比4的准确率大于第二阈值。例如,第一异常事件为4个,预设占比3是50%,预设占比4是50%,第一信息中3个第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且这3个第一异常事件的概率中有2个准确率大于第二阈值。此外,预设占比3还可替换为预设数量3,预设占比4还可替换为预设数量4,示例性的,预设数量3和预设数量4均等于0,也即是,当第一信息指示有一个第一异常事件的发生概率大于第一阈值且概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。还有其他方式,本申请不限定。It should be added that when there are multiple first abnormal events, the first information includes the probability and accuracy of each first abnormal event. Further, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event greater than or equal to a preset percentage of 3 is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of these probabilities greater than or equal to a preset percentage of 4 is greater than a second threshold. For example, if there are 4 first abnormal events, the preset percentage of 3 is 50%, the preset percentage of 4 is 50%, the probability of 3 first abnormal events in the first information is greater than the first threshold, and the accuracy of 2 of these 3 probabilities is greater than the second threshold. In addition, the preset percentage of 3 can be replaced with a preset quantity of 3, and the preset percentage of 4 can be replaced with a preset quantity of 4. For example, both the preset quantity of 3 and the preset quantity of 4 are equal to 0, that is, when the first information indicates that the probability of a first abnormal event is greater than the first threshold and the accuracy of the probability is greater than the second threshold, the first preset condition is determined to be met. Other methods exist, but this application does not limit them.

其中,第一阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第二阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第一阈值和第二阈值的说明可参见上述“UE确定第一信息”相关实施例中的说明。The configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration. The configuration granularity of the second threshold can also be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration. For a description of the first and second thresholds, please refer to the descriptions in the above-mentioned embodiments related to "UE determining first information".

情况二,在服务小区是多个,且第一信息用于指示UE分别与多个服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息时,具体可以有如下示例(一)至示例(三):Scenario 2: When there are multiple serving cells, and the first information is used to indicate the predicted information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and multiple serving cells in the future, the specific examples are as follows (I) to (III):

示例(一),UE在确定第一信息指示第一服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比大于第一预设占比时,确定第一预设条件满足。其中,第一服务小区是将来与UE发生第一异常事件的服务小区。Example (1): When the UE determines that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the first preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is met. Here, the first serving cell is the serving cell where the first abnormal event will occur with the UE in the future.

例如,第一预设占比是50%,UE接入服务小区1至服务小区3,其中,第一信息指示UE与服务小区1将来发生第一异常事件,UE与服务小区2将来发生第一异常事件,UE与服务小区3将来发生第一异常事件,也即是,服务小区1至服务小区3均是第一服务小区,UE确定第一预设条件满足。For example, the first preset percentage is 50%, and the UE accesses serving cell 1 to serving cell 3. The first information indicates that the UE and serving cell 1 will experience a first abnormal event in the future, the UE and serving cell 2 will experience a first abnormal event in the future, and the UE and serving cell 3 will experience a first abnormal event in the future. That is, serving cell 1 to serving cell 3 are all the first serving cells, and the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.

此外,UE在确定第一信息指示第一服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比小于或等于第一预设占比时,确定第一预设条件不满足。Furthermore, when the UE determines that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells is less than or equal to the first preset proportion, the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.

例如,第一预设占比是50%,UE接入服务小区1至服务小区3,其中,第一信息指示UE与服务小区1将来发生第一异常事件,UE与服务小区2将来不发生第一异常事件,UE与服务小区3将来不发生第一异常事件,也即是,服务小区1是第一服务小区,UE确定第一预设条件不满足。For example, the first preset percentage is 50%, and the UE accesses serving cell 1 to serving cell 3. The first information indicates that the UE and serving cell 1 will experience a first abnormal event in the future, the UE and serving cell 2 will not experience a first abnormal event in the future, and the UE and serving cell 3 will not experience a first abnormal event in the future. That is, serving cell 1 is the first serving cell, and the UE determines that the first preset condition is not met.

示例性的,第一预设条件是第一服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比大于第一预设占比。For example, the first preset condition is that the proportion of the first serving cell among multiple serving cells is greater than the first preset proportion.

其中,第一预设占比还可替换为第一预设数量,也即是,UE在确定第一信息指示第一服务小区的数量大于第一预设数量时,确定第一预设条件满足;UE在确定第一信息指示第一服务小区的数量小于或等于第一预设数量时,确定第一预设条件不满足。在一个具体场景中,第一预设数量等于0,可以理解,UE确定多个服务小区中存在第一服务小区时,确定第一预设条件满足;UE确定多个服务小区都不是第一服务小区时,确定第一预设条件不满足。The first preset percentage can also be replaced by a first preset quantity. That is, when the UE determines that the number of first serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the first preset quantity, the first preset condition is satisfied; when the UE determines that the number of first serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the first preset quantity, the first preset condition is not satisfied. In a specific scenario, the first preset quantity is equal to 0. This can be understood as the UE determining that the first preset condition is satisfied when it determines that the first serving cell exists among multiple serving cells; and the UE determining that the first preset condition is not satisfied when it determines that none of the multiple serving cells are the first serving cell.

需要补充的是,当第一异常事件是多个时,可以有如下两种方式:方式a,第一信息中包括每个服务小区对应的指示信息,UE根据每个服务小区对应的指示信息,确定每个服务小区是否为第一服务小区(对应于上述例子a)。方式b,第一信息中包括每个服务小区发生多个第一异常事件时该多个第一异常事件各自对应的指示信息,UE针对每个服务小区,根据该多个第一异常事件各自对应的指示信息,确定每个服务小区是否为第一服务小区(对应于上述例子b)。具体实现还可参见上述示例一。It should be added that when there are multiple first abnormal events, there are two possible approaches: Approach a: The first information includes indication information corresponding to each serving cell. The UE determines whether each serving cell is the first serving cell based on the indication information corresponding to each serving cell (corresponding to example a above). Approach b: The first information includes indication information corresponding to each of the multiple first abnormal events when multiple first abnormal events occur in each serving cell. The UE determines whether each serving cell is the first serving cell based on the indication information corresponding to each of the multiple first abnormal events (corresponding to example b above). For a more detailed implementation, please refer to Example 1 above.

示例(二),UE在确定第一信息指示第二服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比大于第二预设占比时,确定第一预设条件满足。第二服务小区是将来与UE发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值的服务小区。Example (2): When the UE determines that the proportion of the second serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the second preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is met. The second serving cell is a serving cell whose probability of a first abnormal event occurring with the UE in the future is greater than a first threshold.

此外,UE在确定第一信息指示第二服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比小于或等于第二预设占比时,确定第一预设条件不满足。Furthermore, when the UE determines that the proportion of the second serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the second preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is not met.

示例性的,第一预设条件是第二服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比大于第二预设占比。For example, the first preset condition is that the proportion of the second serving cell among multiple serving cells is greater than the second preset proportion.

其中,第二预设占比还可替换为第二预设数量,也即是,UE在确定第一信息指示第二服务小区的数量大于第二预设数量时,确定第一预设条件满足;UE在确定第一信息指示第二服务小区的数量小于或等于第二预设数量时,确定第一预设条件不满足。在一个具体场景中,第二预设数量等于0,可以理解,UE确定多个服务小区中存在第二服务小区时,确定第一预设条件满足,UE确定多个服务小区都不是第二服务小区时,确定第一预设条件不满足。The second preset percentage can also be replaced by a second preset quantity. That is, when the UE determines that the number of second serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the second preset quantity, the first preset condition is satisfied; when the UE determines that the number of second serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the second preset quantity, the first preset condition is not satisfied. In a specific scenario, the second preset quantity is equal to 0. This can be understood as the UE determining that the first preset condition is satisfied when it determines that a second serving cell exists among multiple serving cells, and that the first preset condition is not satisfied when it determines that none of the multiple serving cells are the second serving cell.

需要补充的是,当第一异常事件是多个时,UE可根据第一信息中每个服务小区发生多个第一异常事件各自对应的概率,确定该每个服务小区是否为第二服务小区,具体还可参见上述示例二。It should be added that when there are multiple first abnormal events, the UE can determine whether each serving cell is a second serving cell based on the probability of each of the multiple first abnormal events occurring in each serving cell in the first information. For details, please refer to Example 2 above.

其中,第一阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第一阈值的说明可参见上述“UE确定第一信息”相关实施例中的说明。The configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration. For an explanation of the first threshold, please refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiments related to "UE determining first information".

示例(三),UE在确定第一信息指示第三服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比大于第三预设占比时,确定第一预设条件满足。其中,第三服务小区是将来与UE发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且与UE发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值的服务小区。Example (3): When the UE determines that the proportion of the third serving cell among multiple serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the third preset proportion, it determines that the first preset condition is met. Here, the third serving cell is a serving cell whose probability of a first abnormal event occurring with the UE in the future is greater than a first threshold, and whose accuracy in predicting the probability of a first abnormal event occurring with the UE is greater than a second threshold.

示例性的,第一预设条件是第三服务小区在多个服务小区中的占比大于第三预设占比。For example, the first preset condition is that the proportion of the third serving cell among multiple serving cells is greater than the third preset proportion.

其中,第三预设占比还可替换为第三预设数量,也即是,UE在确定第一信息指示第三服务小区的数量大于第三预设数量时,确定第一预设条件满足;UE在确定第一信息指示第三服务小区的数量小于或等于第三预设数量时,确定第一预设条件不满足。在一个具体场景中,第三预设数量等于0,可以理解,UE确定多个服务小区中存在第三服务小区时,确定第一预设条件满足,UE确定多个服务小区都不是第三服务小区时,确定第一预设条件不满足。The third preset percentage can also be replaced by a third preset quantity. That is, when the UE determines that the number of third serving cells indicated by the first information is greater than the third preset quantity, the first preset condition is satisfied; when the UE determines that the number of third serving cells indicated by the first information is less than or equal to the third preset quantity, the first preset condition is not satisfied. In a specific scenario, the third preset quantity is equal to 0. This can be understood as the UE determining that the first preset condition is satisfied when it determines that a third serving cell exists among multiple serving cells, and that the first preset condition is not satisfied when it determines that none of the multiple serving cells are third serving cells.

需要补充的是,当第一异常事件是多个时,UE可根据第一信息中每个服务小区发生多个第一异常事件各自对应的概率和概率的准确率,确定该每个服务小区是否为第三服务小区,具体还可参见上述示例三。It should be added that when there are multiple first abnormal events, the UE can determine whether each serving cell is the third serving cell based on the probability and accuracy of each first abnormal event occurring in each serving cell in the first information. For details, please refer to Example 3 above.

其中,第一阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第二阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第一阈值的配置粒度可基于模型的配置确定,也可以基于测量配置确定。第一阈值和第二阈值的说明可参见上述“UE确定第一信息”相关实施例中的说明。The configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration. The configuration granularity of the second threshold can also be determined based on the model configuration or the measurement configuration. The configuration granularity of the first threshold can be determined based on either the model configuration or the measurement configuration. For a description of the first and second thresholds, please refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiments related to "UE determining first information".

示例性的,UE中可预配置或者预定义有第一预设条件。又示例性的,UE中还可从第一基站中获得第一预设条件。For example, the UE may have a first preset condition pre-configured or pre-defined. Also for example, the UE may obtain the first preset condition from the first base station.

可将第一预设条件、第一指示信息和第二指示信息(又可称为是第四信息)统称为第七信息。The first preset condition, the first instruction information, and the second instruction information (also known as the fourth information) can be collectively referred to as the seventh information.

在一个可能示例中,第一基站向UE发送第七信息,相应的,UE接收来自第一基站的第七信息。示例性的,第七信息携带于RRC消息中。例如,RRC消息包括测量配置,测量配置中包括第七信息;再例如,RRC消息是RRC重配置消息,RRC重配置消息中包括第七信息。In one possible example, the first base station sends the seventh information to the UE, and correspondingly, the UE receives the seventh information from the first base station. Exemplarily, the seventh information is carried in an RRC message. For example, the RRC message includes a measurement configuration, which includes the seventh information; or, for another example, the RRC message is an RRC reconfiguration message, which includes the seventh information.

又一个可能示例中,UE中预配置或者预定义有第七信息。具体的,UE的存储器中存储有第七信息,UE的处理器能够从存储器中读取(或获取)第七信息。In another possible example, the UE has pre-configured or pre-defined seventh information. Specifically, the UE's memory stores the seventh information, and the UE's processor can read (or retrieve) the seventh information from the memory.

需要补充的是,UE确定第一信息的触发条件可以有如下示例:UE周期确定第一信息,该周期可以是由第一基站配置的(如携带于第七信息中),也可以是预配置的。或者还可以是,UE在接收到来自第一基站的第七信息之后,响应于第七信息,确定第一信息。或者还可以是,UE在确定出某个邻区的测量结果之后,确定第一信息。或者还可以是,UE在进行邻区测量之前,确定第一信息。当然,UE还可在其他触发条件下,确定第一信息,本申请不限定。It should be added that the triggering conditions for the UE to determine the first information can be as follows: The UE periodically determines the first information, which can be configured by the first base station (e.g., carried in the seventh information) or pre-configured. Alternatively, the UE determines the first information in response to the seventh information received from the first base station. Alternatively, the UE determines the first information after determining the measurement result of a neighboring cell. Alternatively, the UE determines the first information before performing neighboring cell measurements. Of course, the UE can also determine the first information under other triggering conditions, which are not limited in this application.

进一步的,UE在确定第一时间时,具体可以有如下两种情况:Furthermore, when the UE determines the first time, there are two specific scenarios:

在服务小区是一个时,UE可以根据UE与该服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的发生时间,确定第一时间。例如,当第一异常事件是一个时,UE可将UE与该服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的发生时间,确定为第一时间;当第一异常事件是多个时,UE可将UE与该服务小区之间将来发生的该多个第一异常事件中的最早发生时间(或最晚发生时间)作为第一时间。When there is only one serving cell, the UE can determine the first time based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future. For example, when there is only one first abnormal event, the UE can determine the first time as the occurrence time of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future; when there are multiple first abnormal events, the UE can take the earliest (or latest) occurrence time among the multiple first abnormal events that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future as the first time.

在服务小区是多个时,UE可以根据UE与主小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的发生时间,确定第一时间(具体可参见上一个实施例)。或者,UE根据UE分别与多个服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的发生时间,确定第一时间,例如,UE将UE分别与多个服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的发生时间中的最早发生时间(或最晚发生时间)作为第一时间。When there are multiple serving cells, the UE can determine the first time based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event between the UE and the primary cell in the future (see the previous embodiment for details). Alternatively, the UE can determine the first time based on the occurrence time of the first abnormal event between the UE and each of the multiple serving cells in the future. For example, the UE can use the earliest (or latest) occurrence time among the occurrence times of the first abnormal event between the UE and each of the multiple serving cells in the future as the first time.

UE接入第一小区,具体可以有如下实现方式一至实现方式四:UE access to the first cell can be implemented in the following ways, from Method 1 to Method 4:

实现方式一:UE向第一基站发送测量报告,测量报告用于触发第一基站为UE选择目标小区。Implementation method 1: The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, and the measurement report is used to trigger the first base station to select a target cell for the UE.

UE向第一基站发送测量报告,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息(或称为测量结果)。第一基站接收来自UE的测量报告,根据测量报告中多个第二小区的信号质量信息,从多个第二小区中选择第一小区(相当于目标小区)。随后,第一基站向UE发送第一小区的配置信息。UE接收来自第一基站的第一小区的配置信息,根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, which includes signal quality information (or measurement results) of multiple second cells. The first base station receives the measurement report from the UE and, based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells in the report, selects a first cell (equivalent to a target cell) from among the multiple second cells. Subsequently, the first base station sends the configuration information of the first cell to the UE. The UE receives the configuration information of the first cell from the first base station and, based on the configuration information, switches to the first cell.

多个第二小区具体可以是服务小区的多个邻区。示例性的,UE向第一基站发送测量报告之前,第一基站还向UE发送测量配置,测量配置可以用于指示多个第二小区。示例性的,测量配置中包括第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示多个第二小区。例如,第三指示信息包括多个第二小区的标识信息,又例如,第三指示信息中包括测量频点,UE可根据测量频点确定覆盖该测量频点的多个第二小区。The multiple second cells can specifically be multiple neighboring cells of the serving cell. For example, before the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, the first base station also sends a measurement configuration to the UE, which can be used to indicate multiple second cells. For example, the measurement configuration includes third indication information, which is used to indicate multiple second cells. For instance, the third indication information includes identification information of multiple second cells; or, for example, the third indication information includes a measurement frequency point, which the UE can use to determine multiple second cells covering that measurement frequency point.

其中,第二小区的信号质量信息,具体可以是,UE测量第二小区的下行参考信号得到的。下行参考信号例如是CSI-RS、SSB中的一项或多项。信号质量信息例如是RSRP、RSSI、RSRQ、SINR。Specifically, the signal quality information of the second cell can be obtained by the UE measuring the downlink reference signal of the second cell. The downlink reference signal can be, for example, one or more of CSI-RS and SSB. Signal quality information can be, for example, RSRP, RSSI, RSRQ, and SINR.

第一小区的配置信息用于UE切换(接入)至第一小区。第一小区的配置信息中包括第一小区的参数配置和资源配置。其中,第一小区的参数配置包括其关联基站为UE生成的C-RNTI;第一小区的资源中包括UE随机接入到该第一小区时所需的资源,例如,包括专用RACH资源和/或公用RACH资源。The configuration information of the first cell is used for UE handover (access) to the first cell. The configuration information of the first cell includes the parameter configuration and resource configuration of the first cell. Among them, the parameter configuration of the first cell includes the C-RNTI generated by its associated base station for the UE; the resources of the first cell include the resources required for the UE to randomly access the first cell, such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources.

第一基站在向UE发送第一小区的配置信息时,具体可以是,第一基站向UE发送第五信息,第五信息包括第一小区的配置信息,第五信息用于指示UE根据第一小区的配置信息切换到第一小区。示例性的,第五信息具体是切换命令消息,切换命令消息例如是携带reconfigurationWithSync字段的RRC重配置消息。When the first base station sends the configuration information of the first cell to the UE, specifically, the first base station sends fifth information to the UE. This fifth information includes the configuration information of the first cell and is used to instruct the UE to switch to the first cell according to the configuration information. For example, the fifth information is a handover command message, which may be an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the `reconfigurationWithSync` field.

第一基站在向UE发送第一小区的配置信息之前,还可先获得第一小区的配置信息。基于第一小区是否与第一基站关联,如下提供第一基站的两种操作,其中,操作1适用于第一小区与服务小区由同一个基站管理,也即是,第一小区由第一基站管理的场景中;操作2适用于第一小区与服务小区由两个不同基站管理,也即是,第一小区由第二基站(也即是第二接入网设备)管理且第一基站和第二基站不同的场景中。Before sending the configuration information of the first cell to the UE, the first base station can also obtain the configuration information of the first cell. Based on whether the first cell is associated with the first base station, two operations for the first base station are provided below. Operation 1 applies to scenarios where the first cell and the serving cell are managed by the same base station; operation 2 applies to scenarios where the first cell and the serving cell are managed by two different base stations, i.e., the first cell is managed by a second base station (i.e., a second access network device) and the first and second base stations are different.

操作1,第一基站为第一小区确定第一小区的配置信息。Operation 1: The first base station determines the configuration information of the first cell.

操作2,第一基站向第二基站发送切换请求消息,第二基站针对第一小区确定第一小区的配置信息,将第一小区的配置信息通过切换请求确认消息发送给第一基站。Operation 2: The first base station sends a handover request message to the second base station. The second base station determines the configuration information of the first cell and sends the configuration information of the first cell to the first base station through a handover request confirmation message.

可选的,测量报告中还可包括服务小区的信号质量信息。其中,服务小区可以是一个或多个。Optionally, the measurement report may also include signal quality information of the serving cell. The serving cell may be one or more.

可选的,测量报告中还可包括第一信息或第一信息的部分。例如,当第一信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率,以及,UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的开始时间和结束时间,测量报告中可携带UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率(即第一信息的部分)。如此,第一基站可根据第一信息确定UE发送测量报告的原因,为UE选择合适的第一小区,并指示UE切换至第一小区。Optionally, the measurement report may also include first information or a portion of first information. For example, if the first information includes the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and the start and end times of the first abnormal event, the measurement report may carry the probability of the first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell (i.e., a portion of the first information). In this way, the first base station can determine the reason why the UE sends the measurement report based on the first information, select a suitable first cell for the UE, and instruct the UE to hand over to the first cell.

可选的,测量报告中还可包括第八信息,第八信息用于指示多个第二小区中预测信息满足第二预设条件的第二小区(可称为第五小区)。Optionally, the measurement report may also include eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell (which may be referred to as the fifth cell) among multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition.

其中,第二小区的预测信息具体是,第二小区作为UE切换的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。第二小区对应的预测信息中可包括第二小区是否发生第二异常事件、第二小区发生第二异常事件的概率、第二小区发生第二异常事件的概率的准确率、第二小区发生第二异常事件的开始时间、第二小区发生第二异常事件的结束时间中的一项或多项。UE确定第二小区发生第二异常事件的预测信息的方式,可参见上述UE确定服务小区发生第一异常事件的预测信息方式。Specifically, the prediction information for the second cell refers to the prediction information of a second abnormal event occurring when the second cell serves as the target cell for UE handover. The prediction information for the second cell may include one or more of the following: whether a second abnormal event occurs in the second cell, the probability of a second abnormal event occurring in the second cell, the accuracy of the probability of a second abnormal event occurring in the second cell, the start time of the second abnormal event occurring in the second cell, and the end time of the second abnormal event occurring in the second cell. The method by which the UE determines the prediction information of a second abnormal event occurring in the second cell is the same as the method described above for the UE to determine the prediction information of a first abnormal event occurring in the serving cell.

第二预设条件是第二小区作为目标小区时不发生第二异常事件,或者,第二预设条件是第二小区作为目标小区时发生第二异常事件的概率小于第1阈值,或者,第二预设条件是第二小区作为目标小区时发生第二异常事件的概率小于第1阈值且概率的准确率大于第2阈值。其中,第1阈值、第2阈值的配置粒度可参见上述第一阈值、第二阈值的描述。The second preset condition is that no second abnormal event occurs when the second cell is the target cell; or, the second preset condition is that the probability of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is the target cell is less than the first threshold; or, the second preset condition is that the probability of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is the target cell is less than the first threshold and the accuracy of the probability is greater than the second threshold. The configuration granularity of the first and second thresholds can be found in the descriptions of the first and second thresholds above.

示例性的,第二信息中包括第五小区的标识信息。For example, the second information includes the identification information of the fifth cell.

或者,第二信息中包括第五小区对应的组合,第五小区对应的组合包括第五小区的标识信息和发生第二异常事件的概率(或发生第二异常事件的概率和发生第二异常事件的概率的准确率),可选的,第五小区对应的组合中还包括发生第二异常事件的开始时间和/或结束时间。Alternatively, the second information may include the combination corresponding to the fifth cell, which includes the identification information of the fifth cell and the probability of the second abnormal event occurring (or the probability of the second abnormal event occurring and the accuracy of the probability of the second abnormal event occurring). Optionally, the combination corresponding to the fifth cell may also include the start time and/or end time of the second abnormal event occurring.

或者,第二信息中包括第五小区对应的组合,第五小区对应的组合包括第五小区的标识信息和第二异常事件不发生。Alternatively, the second information may include the combination corresponding to the fifth cell, which includes the identification information of the fifth cell and the absence of the second abnormal event.

或者,第二信息中包括第五小区对应的预测信息。Alternatively, the second information may include the prediction information corresponding to the fifth cell.

或者,第二信息中包括第二小区对应的组合,示例性的,每个第二小区对应的组合中包括第二小区的标识信息和发生第二异常事件的概率(或发生第二异常事件的概率和发生第二异常事件的概率的准确率),可选的,第二小区对应的组合中还包括发生第二异常事件的开始时间和/或结束时间等。Alternatively, the second information may include combinations corresponding to the second cell. For example, each combination corresponding to the second cell may include the identification information of the second cell and the probability of the second abnormal event occurring (or the probability of the second abnormal event occurring and the accuracy of the probability of the second abnormal event occurring). Optionally, the combination corresponding to the second cell may also include the start time and/or end time of the second abnormal event.

其中,第二异常事件具体可以是移动性异常事件,包括过晚切换(too late HO)、过早切换(too early HO)、切换至错误小区(HO to wrong cell)、非必要切换(unnecessary HO)、乒乓切换(ping-pong HO)、RLF、第二HOF中的一项或多项。具体说明如下:The second abnormal event can specifically be a mobility abnormal event, including one or more of the following: too late handover, too early handover, handover to the wrong cell, unnecessary handover, ping-pong handover, RLF, and second HOF. Specific details are as follows:

1、过晚切换:UE在接入到服务小区一段时间后,与服务小区之间将来发生RLF,UE尝试与其他小区重建连接。这种情况主要指服务小区的信号质量变差,UE没有收到来自服务基站的切换命令消息,因此,UE在服务小区检测到RLF后再尝试与其他小区尝试重建连接。1. Late Handover: After a UE has been connected to the serving cell for a period of time, a Relationship Default (RLF) may occur between the UE and the serving cell. The UE then attempts to re-establish a connection with another cell. This situation mainly refers to a deterioration in the signal quality of the serving cell, where the UE does not receive a handover command message from the serving base station. Therefore, the UE attempts to re-establish a connection with another cell only after the serving cell detects the RLF.

2、过早切换:UE成功从源小区切换到目标小区后,UE很快与目标小区发生RLF;或者,UE在从源小区切换到目标小区的过程中发生切换失败,UE在源小区尝试重建连接。2. Premature handover: After the UE successfully hands over from the source cell to the target cell, the UE quickly experiences an RLF with the target cell; or, the UE fails to handover during the process of handover from the source cell to the target cell, and the UE attempts to rebuild the connection in the source cell.

3、切换至错误小区:UE成功从源小区切换到目标小区后,UE很快与目标小区发生RLF,或者,UE在从源小区切换到目标小区的过程中发生切换失败,UE在其它小区(这里的其它小区不同于源小区和目标小区)尝试重建连接。3. Handover to the wrong cell: After the UE successfully hands over from the source cell to the target cell, the UE quickly experiences an RLF with the target cell, or the UE fails to handover during the handover process from the source cell to the target cell, and the UE attempts to rebuild the connection in other cells (the other cells here are different from the source cell and the target cell).

4、非必要切换:即使源系统覆盖的质量足以满足UE使用的业务,UE也会从源系统中的小区切换到目标系统中的小区,其中,源系统例如是新空口(new radio,NR)系统,目标系统例如是通用移动通讯系统(universal mobile telecommunications system,UMTS)演进陆地无线接入网(evolution UMTS terrestrial radio access network,E-UTRAN)系统。因此,该切换可能被认为是不必要的切换,或者又称为是,非必要的跨系统切换、无连接失败的过早跨系统切换等。4. Unnecessary Handover: Even if the coverage quality of the source system is sufficient to meet the services used by the UE, the UE may still hand over from a cell in the source system to a cell in the target system. The source system could be, for example, a New Radio (NR) system, and the target system could be, for example, an Evolution UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) system. Therefore, this handover may be considered unnecessary, or referred to as an unnecessary cross-system handover, or a premature cross-system handover without connection failure.

或者,在源小区的覆盖足以满足UE使用业务的情况下,UE从源小区切换到目标小区。Alternatively, if the coverage of the source cell is sufficient to meet the UE's service needs, the UE can switch from the source cell to the target cell.

5、乒乓切换:UE从源系统中的小区切换到目标系统中的小区,在预定义的有限时间内,UE又切换回源系统中的小区,而源系统的覆盖足以满足UE使用的服务。源系统例如是NR系统,目标系统例如是E-UTRAN系统。或者,UE从源小区切换到目标小区,而在预定义的有限时间内,UE又切换回源小区,源小区的覆盖足以满足UE使用的业务。5. Ping-Pong Handover: The UE switches from a cell in the source system to a cell in the target system. Within a predefined limited time, the UE switches back to a cell in the source system, where the coverage of the source system is sufficient to meet the UE's service needs. The source system could be an NR system, and the target system could be an E-UTRAN system. Alternatively, the UE switches from a source cell to a target cell, and within a predefined limited time, switches back to the source cell, where the coverage of the source cell is sufficient to meet the UE's service needs.

6、RLF至少包括以下一种或多种:6. RLF includes at least one or more of the following:

(1)物理层问题导致计时器超时的RLF。(2)在无线问题计时器运行,且触发测量上报时启动的计时器超时的RLF。(3)随机接入过程失败的RLF。(4)RLC失败的RLF。(5)检测到连续上行的LBT失败的RLF。(6)针对IAB MT,接收到父节点的BH RLF的RLF。具体可参见上述步骤401中的描述。(1) RLF caused by physical layer problem leading to timer timeout. (2) RLF caused by timer timeout triggered when wireless problem timer is running and measurement reporting is initiated. (3) RLF caused by random access procedure failure. (4) RLF caused by RLC failure. (5) RLF caused by detection of continuous uplink LBT failure. (6) RLF caused by receiving BH RLF from the parent node for IAB MT. See step 401 above for details.

7、第二HOF至少包括以下一种或多种:7. The second HOF includes at least one or more of the following:

(1)在切换过程中,UE在收到来自源小区的切换命令消息(比如,携带reconfigurationWithSync字段的RRC重配置消息)之后,启动切换计时器(例如5G中的T304)。在切换计时器超时之前,UE在目标小区成功完成随机接入,说明UE成功从源切换到目标小区,且UE停止该切换计时器。在切换计时器超时时,UE仍未在目标小区成功完成随机接入,说明UE未成功从源切换到目标小区,也即是切换失败。(1) During the handover process, after receiving a handover command message from the source cell (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field), the UE starts a handover timer (e.g., T304 in 5G). If the UE successfully completes random access in the target cell before the handover timer expires, it indicates that the UE has successfully handed over from the source cell to the target cell, and the UE stops the handover timer. If the UE still fails to successfully complete random access in the target cell when the handover timer expires, it indicates that the UE has not successfully handed over from the source cell to the target cell, i.e., the handover has failed.

(2)UE在满足测量事件进入条件到UE成功接收到源小区的切换命令消息的第一时间段内,发生RLF。具体可参见上述步骤401中的描述。(2) Within the first time period from when the UE meets the measurement event entry condition to when the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell, an RLF occurs. See the description in step 401 above for details.

(3)UE在满足测量事件进入条件到UE成功接收到源小区的切换命令消息的第一时间段内,检测到PDCCH失败。具体可参见上述步骤401中的描述。(3) During the first time period from when the UE meets the measurement event entry condition to when the UE successfully receives the handover command message from the source cell, the UE detects a PDCCH failure. See step 401 above for details.

(4)UE在接收到源小区的切换命令消息(比如,携带reconfigurationWithSync字段的RRC重配置消息)到UE成功传输切换完成消息(比如,RRC重配置完成消息)的第二时间段内,检测到PDCCH失败(例如,检测到目标小区的PDCCH失败)。其中,传输切换完成消息是UE对切换命令消息的响应。(4) During the second time period between the UE receiving the handover command message from the source cell (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message carrying the reconfigurationWithSync field) and the UE successfully transmitting the handover completion message (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration completion message), the UE detects a PDCCH failure (e.g., detects a PDCCH failure in the target cell). The transmission of the handover completion message is the UE's response to the handover command message.

其中,UE确定接收到源小区的切换命令消息的时间点是时间点3,UE成功传输切换完成消息的时间点是时间点4,该第二时间段具体是时间点3至时间点4之间的时间段。Specifically, the time point at which the UE determines that it has received the handover command message from the source cell is time point 3, and the time point at which the UE successfully transmits the handover completion message is time point 4. The second time period is specifically the time period between time point 3 and time point 4.

当然,第二HOF中还可包括其他的切换失败方式,本申请不限定第二HOF的具体定义。Of course, the second HOF may also include other switching failure modes, and this application does not limit the specific definition of the second HOF.

如此,第一基站在为UE选择第一小区时,不仅考虑多个第二小区的信号质量,还考虑第二小区作为UE切换时的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。例如,第一小区可以是多个第二小区中信号质量较好且不发生第二异常事件的第二小区,或者是,多个第二小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低的第二小区,或者是,多个第二小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低且概率的准确率相对较高的第二小区。有助于保障UE通信的稳定性。Thus, when selecting a first cell for the UE, the first base station considers not only the signal quality of multiple second cells, but also the predicted information of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is used as the target cell for UE handover. For example, the first cell could be a second cell with good signal quality and no second abnormal event, or a second cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event occurring, or a second cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event occurring, and a relatively high accuracy rate in predicting the probability. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.

可选的,测量报告中还可包括第一时间,第一基站可在第二时间向UE发送第一小区的配置信息。其中,第二时间早于第一时间,或者说,第二时间需要保障UE能够在第一时间之前接入第一小区。Optionally, the measurement report may also include a first timeframe, during which the first base station may send the configuration information of the first cell to the UE at a second timeframe. The second timeframe is earlier than the first timeframe; in other words, the second timeframe must ensure that the UE can access the first cell before the first timeframe.

上述技术方案中,UE一旦确定第一预设条件满足,则可向第一基站发送测量报告,也即是,本申请定义一种新的触发上报测量报告的方式,即UE确定第一预设条件满足。或者说,UE将“确定第一预设条件满足”作为触发上报测量报告发送的一个触发条件,或者当成一种新定义的测量事件。如此,有助于触发第一基站尽快向UE发送切换命令消息。有助于保障UE通信的稳定性。In the above technical solution, once the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, it can send a measurement report to the first base station. That is, this application defines a new way to trigger the reporting of measurement reports: the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. In other words, the UE uses "determining that the first preset condition is met" as a trigger condition for sending a measurement report, or as a newly defined measurement event. This helps to trigger the first base station to send a handover command message to the UE as quickly as possible, thus helping to ensure the stability of UE communication.

实现方式二:UE向第一基站发送测量报告,测量报告用于触发第一基站为UE选择候选小区。Method 2: The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, which triggers the first base station to select a candidate cell for the UE.

具体的,UE向第一基站发送测量报告,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息。第一基站接收来自UE的测量报告,根据测量报告从多个第二小区中选择候选小区,向UE发送候选小区的配置信息。UE接收来自第一基站的候选小区的配置信息,根据候选小区的下行参考信号,从候选小区中选择第一小区,进而根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。其中,候选小区可以是一个或多个。Specifically, the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, which includes signal quality information from multiple second cells. The first base station receives the measurement report from the UE, selects candidate cells from the multiple second cells based on the measurement report, and sends the configuration information of the candidate cells to the UE. The UE receives the configuration information of the candidate cells from the first base station, selects a first cell from the candidate cells based on the downlink reference signal of the candidate cells, and then switches to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell. There can be one or more candidate cells.

多个第二小区具体可以是服务小区的多个邻区。示例性的,UE向第一基站发送测量报告之前,第一基站向UE发送测量配置,测量配置用于指示多个第二小区。具体可参见实现方式一中的描述。The multiple second cells can specifically be multiple neighboring cells of the serving cell. For example, before the UE sends a measurement report to the first base station, the first base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, which indicates the multiple second cells. See the description in Implementation Method 1 for details.

其中,第二小区的信号质量信息,具体可以是,UE测量第二小区的下行参考信号得到的,下行参考信号例如是CSI-RS、SSB中的一项或多项。信号质量信息例如是RSRP、RSSI、RSRQ、SINR。Specifically, the signal quality information of the second cell can be obtained by the UE measuring the downlink reference signal of the second cell. The downlink reference signal may be one or more of CSI-RS and SSB. Signal quality information may include RSRP, RSSI, RSRQ, and SINR.

候选小区的配置信息用于UE切换至该候选小区。候选小区的配置信息中包括候选小区的参数配置和资源配置。候选小区的参数配置包括其所属基站为UE生成的C-RNTI;候选小区的资源中包括UE随机接入到该候选小区时所需的资源,例如包括专用RACH资源和/或公用RACH资源。可选的,候选小区的配置信息中还包括候选小区的执行触发条件,当UE确定候选小区的下行参考信号(或信号质量信息)满足候选小区的执行触发条件时,自主决定切换至该候选小区。The configuration information of a candidate cell is used by the UE to hand over to that candidate cell. The configuration information includes the candidate cell's parameter configuration and resource configuration. The candidate cell's parameter configuration includes the C-RNTI generated by its base station for the UE; the candidate cell's resources include the resources required for the UE to randomly access the candidate cell, such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources. Optionally, the candidate cell's configuration information also includes the candidate cell's execution triggering conditions. When the UE determines that the downlink reference signal (or signal quality information) of the candidate cell meets the candidate cell's execution triggering conditions, it autonomously decides to hand over to that candidate cell.

第一基站在向UE发送候选小区的配置信息时,具体可以是,第一基站向UE发送第六信息,第六信息包括候选小区的配置信息,第六信息用于指示UE根据候选小区分别对应的配置信息,从候选小区中选择第一小区,并切换到第一小区。示例性的,第六信息具体是CHO配置信息,CHO配置信息例如是携带于RRC重配置消息中。其中,候选小区可以是一个或多个。When the first base station sends the configuration information of candidate cells to the UE, it may specifically send sixth information to the UE. This sixth information includes the configuration information of the candidate cells and is used to instruct the UE to select a first cell from the candidate cells based on the configuration information corresponding to each candidate cell, and then switch to the first cell. For example, the sixth information may specifically be CHO configuration information, which may be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message. There may be one or more candidate cells.

第一基站在向UE发送候选小区的配置信息之前,还可先获得候选小区的配置信息。基于候选小区是否与第一基站关联,如下提供第一基站的两种操作,其中,操作1适用于候选小区与服务小区由同一个基站管理,也即是,候选小区由第一基站管理的场景中;操作2适用于候选小区与服务小区由两个不同基站管理,也即是,候选小区由候选基站管理且第一基站和候选基站不同的场景中。Before sending the candidate cell configuration information to the UE, the first base station can first obtain the candidate cell configuration information. Based on whether the candidate cell is associated with the first base station, the following two operations of the first base station are provided. Operation 1 is applicable to the scenario where the candidate cell and the serving cell are managed by the same base station, that is, the candidate cell is managed by the first base station; Operation 2 is applicable to the scenario where the candidate cell and the serving cell are managed by two different base stations, that is, the candidate cell is managed by the candidate base station and the first base station and the candidate base station are different.

操作1,第一基站为候选小区确定候选小区的配置信息。示例性的,第一基站还可确定候选小区的执行触发条件,将候选小区的执行触发条件携带于候选小区的配置信息中发送给UE。Operation 1: The first base station determines the configuration information of the candidate cells. For example, the first base station may also determine the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cells and send the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cells to the UE along with the configuration information of the candidate cells.

操作2,第一基站向候选基站发送切换请求消息,候选基站针对候选小区确定候选小区的配置信息,将候选小区的配置信息通过切换请求确认消息发送给第一基站。示例性的,第一基站在接收到来自候选基站的候选小区的配置信息之后,还可确定候选小区的执行触发条件,将候选小区的执行触发条件携带于候选小区的配置信息中发送给UE。In operation 2, the first base station sends a handover request message to the candidate base station. The candidate base station determines the configuration information of the candidate cell and sends the configuration information of the candidate cell to the first base station via a handover request confirmation message. For example, after receiving the configuration information of the candidate cell from the candidate base station, the first base station can also determine the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cell and send the execution triggering conditions of the candidate cell to the UE along with the configuration information of the candidate cell.

可选的,测量报告中还可包括服务小区的信号质量信息。其中,服务小区可以是一个或多个。可选的,测量报告中还可包括第一信息或第一信息中的部分。可选的,测量报告中还包括多个第二小区分别作为UE切换的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。具体实现均可参见实现方式一中的描述。Optionally, the measurement report may also include signal quality information of the serving cell. The serving cell may be one or more. Optionally, the measurement report may also include first information or a portion of the first information. Optionally, the measurement report may also include prediction information of second abnormal events occurring when multiple second cells are respectively used as target cells for UE handover. Specific implementations can be found in the description of Implementation Method 1.

如此,第一基站在为UE选择候选小区时,不仅考虑多个第二小区的信号质量,还考虑第二小区作为UE切换时的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。例如,候选小区可以是多个第二小区中信号质量较好且不发生第二异常事件的第二小区,或者是,多个第二小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低的第二小区,或者是,多个第二小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低且概率的准确率相对较高的第二小区。有助于保障UE通信的稳定性。Thus, when the first base station selects a candidate cell for the UE, it considers not only the signal quality of multiple second cells, but also the predicted information of the second abnormal event occurring when the second cell is used as the target cell during UE handover. For example, a candidate cell could be a second cell with good signal quality that does not experience the second abnormal event, or a second cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of experiencing the second abnormal event, or a second cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of experiencing the second abnormal event, and a relatively high accuracy in probability calculation. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.

可选的,测量报告中还可包括第一时间,第一基站可在第二时间向UE发送第一小区的配置信息。其中,第二时间早于第一时间,或者说,第二时间需要保障UE能够在第一时间之前接入第一小区。Optionally, the measurement report may also include a first timeframe, during which the first base station may send the configuration information of the first cell to the UE at a second timeframe. The second timeframe is earlier than the first timeframe; in other words, the second timeframe must ensure that the UE can access the first cell before the first timeframe.

上述技术方案中,UE一旦确定第一预设条件满足,则可向第一基站发送测量报告,也即是,本申请定义一种新的触发上报测量报告的方式,即UE确定第一预设条件满足。或者说,UE将“确定第一预设条件满足”作为触发上报测量报告发送的一个触发条件,或者当成一种新定义的测量事件。如此,有助于触发第一基站尽快向UE发送切换命令消息。有助于保障UE通信的稳定性。In the above technical solution, once the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, it can send a measurement report to the first base station. That is, this application defines a new way to trigger the reporting of measurement reports: the UE determines that the first preset condition is met. In other words, the UE uses "determining that the first preset condition is met" as a trigger condition for sending a measurement report, or as a newly defined measurement event. This helps to trigger the first base station to send a handover command message to the UE as quickly as possible, thus helping to ensure the stability of UE communication.

实现方式三:UE自行发起RRC重建立流程。Implementation Method 3: The UE initiates the RRC re-establishment process itself.

具体的,UE测量多个第三小区的下行参考信号,得到多个第三小区的信号质量信息。UE根据多个第三小区的信号质量信息,从多个第三小区中选择第一小区。UE向第一小区关联的基站(记为第二基站,相当于第二接入网设备)发送第二信息,其中,第二信息用于指示(或请求)接入第一小区。Specifically, the UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple third cells to obtain signal quality information for these cells. Based on this signal quality information, the UE selects a first cell from among the third cells. The UE then sends second information to the base station associated with the first cell (referred to as the second base station, equivalent to a second access network device), whereby the second information is used to indicate (or request) access to the first cell.

示例性的,第二信息可以是RRC重建立请求消息。进一步的,RRC重建立请求消息中可携带重建原因信息。示例性的,该重建原因信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,或该重建原因信息是UE预测与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件,或该重建原因信息是UE通过模型,预测与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件,或该重建原因信息是UE预测与服务小区将来发生RLF等。For example, the second information may be an RRC re-establishment request message. Further, the RRC re-establishment request message may carry reconstruction reason information. For example, the reconstruction reason information may include prediction information about a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE's prediction of a first abnormal event occurring with the serving cell in the future, or the UE's prediction of a first abnormal event occurring with the serving cell in the future based on a model, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE's prediction of an RLF (Recurrent Leak) occurring with the serving cell in the future, etc.

多个第三小区具体可以是服务小区的多个邻区。示例性的,UE自行发起RRC重建立流程之前,第一基站向UE发送测量配置,测量配置用于指示多个第三小区。Multiple third cells can specifically be multiple neighboring cells of the serving cell. For example, before the UE initiates the RRC re-establishment procedure itself, the first base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, which is used to indicate multiple third cells.

其中,第一小区可以是多个第三小区中信号质量较好的小区。The first cell can be the cell with better signal quality among multiple third cells.

示例性的,UE还预测多个第三小区作为UE切换时目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息,具体说明可参见上述实现方式一中的描述。进而,UE在从多个第三小区中选择第一小区时,第一小区可以是多个第三小区中信号质量较好且不发生第二异常事件的第三小区,或者是,多个第三小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低的第三小区,或者是,多个第三小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低且概率的准确率相对较高的第三小区。有助于保障UE通信的稳定性。For example, the UE also predicts the occurrence of a second abnormal event when multiple third cells are used as the target cell during UE handover. For details, please refer to the description in Implementation Method 1 above. Furthermore, when the UE selects a first cell from multiple third cells, the first cell can be a third cell with good signal quality and no second abnormal event, or a third cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of a second abnormal event, or a third cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of a second abnormal event, and a relatively high accuracy rate in predicting the probability. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.

实现方式四:UE自行选择某个候选小区进行切换。Implementation Method 4: The UE selects a candidate cell for handover.

在一个可能方式中,UE在接入第一小区之前,还接收来自第一基站的第三信息,第三信息指示多个第四小区的配置信息。示例性的,第三信息中包括多个第四小区的配置信息。UE测量多个第四小区的下行参考信号,得到多个第四小区的信号质量信息。UE根据多个第四小区的信号质量信息,从多个第四小区中确定第一小区。进而,UE根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。In one possible approach, before accessing the first cell, the UE also receives third information from the first base station, which indicates configuration information for multiple fourth cells. For example, the third information includes configuration information for multiple fourth cells. The UE measures the downlink reference signals of the multiple fourth cells to obtain signal quality information for each fourth cell. Based on the signal quality information of the multiple fourth cells, the UE determines the first cell from among the multiple fourth cells. Then, the UE switches to the first cell based on its configuration information.

示例性的,第四小区是第一基站为UE确定的候选小区,第三信息是CHO配置信息。CHO配置信息中包括多个第四小区的配置信息。CHO配置信息例如是携带于RRC重配置消息中。For example, the fourth cell is a candidate cell determined by the first base station for the UE, and the third information is CHO configuration information. The CHO configuration information includes configuration information for multiple fourth cells. The CHO configuration information is, for example, carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.

第四小区的配置信息用于UE切换至该第四小区。第四小区的配置信息中包括第四小区的参数配置和资源配置。其中,第四小区的参数配置包括其关联基站为UE生成的C-RNTI;第四小区的资源中包括UE随机接入到该第四小区时所需的资源,例如包括专用RACH资源和/或公用RACH资源。示例性的,第四小区的配置信息中还包括第四小区的执行触发条件,示例性的,当UE确定第四小区的下行参考信号(或信号质量信息)满足第四小区的执行触发条件时,自主决定切换至该第四小区。The configuration information of the fourth cell is used for UE handover to this fourth cell. The configuration information of the fourth cell includes parameter configuration and resource configuration. Specifically, the parameter configuration of the fourth cell includes the C-RNTI generated by its associated base station for the UE; the resources of the fourth cell include the resources required for the UE to randomly access the fourth cell, such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources. For example, the configuration information of the fourth cell also includes the execution triggering conditions of the fourth cell. For example, when the UE determines that the downlink reference signal (or signal quality information) of the fourth cell meets the execution triggering conditions of the fourth cell, it autonomously decides to handover to this fourth cell.

其中,第一小区可以是多个第四小区中信号质量较好的小区。The first cell can be the cell with better signal quality among multiple fourth cells.

示例性的,UE还预测多个第四小区作为UE切换时目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息,具体说明可参见上述实现方式一中的描述。进而,UE在从多个第四小区中选择第一小区时,第一小区可以是多个第四小区中信号质量较好且不发生第二异常事件的第四小区,或者是,多个第四小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低的第四小区,或者是,多个第四小区中信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低且概率的准确率相对较高的第四小区。有助于保障UE通信的稳定性。For example, the UE also predicts the occurrence of a second abnormal event when multiple fourth cells are used as the target cell during UE handover, as detailed in the description of Implementation Method 1 above. Furthermore, when the UE selects a first cell from multiple fourth cells, the first cell can be a fourth cell with good signal quality and no second abnormal event, or a fourth cell with good signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event, or a fourth cell with good signal quality, a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event, and a relatively high accuracy rate in predicting the probability. This helps ensure the stability of UE communication.

需要指出的是,当UE针对每个第四小区的配置信息,确定每个第四小区的下行参考信号(或信号质量信息)不满足其对应的执行触发条件时,UE也可不考虑执行触发条件,而从多个第四小区中选择第一小区,从而避免UE未选择出第一小区,而影响UE通信的稳定性。It should be noted that when the UE determines that the downlink reference signal (or signal quality information) of each fourth cell does not meet its corresponding execution triggering condition based on the configuration information of each fourth cell, the UE may also disregard the execution triggering condition and select the first cell from multiple fourth cells, thereby avoiding the UE failing to select the first cell and affecting the stability of UE communication.

结合图4相关实施例中,如下提供多个具体场景中的通信方法。Based on the relevant embodiments in Figure 4, the following are communication methods in several specific scenarios.

图5为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第一个具体场景中的实现方法,UE在测量流程中,UE对UE与服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件进行预测,并在确定满足第一预设条件时,向第一基站发送测量结果。从而第一基站根据测量结果,向UE发送切换命令消息(第五信息的一个例子)。Figure 5 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a first specific scenario. During the measurement process, the UE predicts a first abnormal event that may occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and when it determines that a first preset condition is met, it sends the measurement result to the first base station. The first base station then sends a handover command message (an example of the fifth information) to the UE based on the measurement result.

步骤501,第一基站向UE发送测量配置。测量配置中包括第七信息和第三指示信息。Step 501: The first base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE. The measurement configuration includes seventh information and third indication information.

此外,步骤501还可替换为:步骤501a,服务基站向UE发送测量配置,测量配置中包括第三指示信息;步骤501b,服务基站向UE发送第七信息。或者,步骤501还可替换为:步骤501a,服务基站向UE发送测量配置,测量配置中包括第三指示信息;步骤501b,UE获取预定义的(或预配置的)第七信息。当然还可能有其他方式,本申请不再一一举例。Furthermore, step 501 can be replaced by: step 501a, the serving base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, the measurement configuration including third indication information; step 501b, the serving base station sends seventh information to the UE. Alternatively, step 501 can be replaced by: step 501a, the serving base station sends a measurement configuration to the UE, the measurement configuration including third indication information; step 501b, the UE obtains predefined (or pre-configured) seventh information. Of course, there may be other methods, which will not be listed in this application.

其中,第七信息包括第一预设条件、第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的一项或多项。The seventh information includes one or more of the first preset condition, the first instruction information, and the second instruction information.

示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件。For example, the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

又示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值。For example, the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold.

再示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值。For another example, the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.

第一指示信息用于指示第一异常事件,第一异常事件至少包括RLF和/或第一HOF。The first indication information is used to indicate a first abnormal event, which includes at least an RLF and/or a first HOF.

第二指示信息用于指示至少一个测量项,至少一个测量项包括:测量标识、测量对象、报告配置、或测量事件中的至少一个。The second indication information is used to indicate at least one measurement item, which includes at least one of the following: measurement identifier, measurement object, report configuration, or measurement event.

第三指示信息用于指示多个第二小区。例如,第三指示信息包括多个第二小区的标识信息,又例如,第三指示信息中包括测量频点,测量频点与多个第二小区相关联。The third indication information is used to indicate multiple second cells. For example, the third indication information includes identification information of multiple second cells, or, for example, measurement frequency points associated with multiple second cells.

步骤502,UE根据模型确定第一信息。Step 502: The UE determines the first information based on the model.

其中,第一信息是UE与服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息。The first information is the prediction information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

步骤503,UE根据第一信息,确定第一预设条件满足。Step 503: The UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information.

示例性的,UE确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件时,确定第一预设条件满足。For example, when the UE determines that the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.

又示例性的,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。For another example, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.

再示例性的,UE在确定在第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。For another example, when the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, the probability that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability that the first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.

步骤504,UE测量多个第二小区的下行参考信号,得到多个第二小区的信号质量信息。其中,步骤504位于步骤501之后,但不限定步骤504与步骤502(或步骤503)的先后顺序。Step 504: The UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple second cells to obtain signal quality information of multiple second cells. Step 504 is located after step 501, but the order of step 504 and step 502 (or step 503) is not limited.

步骤505,UE向第一基站发送测量报告。Step 505: The UE sends a measurement report to the first base station.

其中,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息。The measurement report includes signal quality information for multiple second cells.

可选的,测量报告中还包括第一信息。可选的,测量报告中还包括第八信息,第八信息用于指示多个第二小区中预测信息满足第二预设条件的第二小区(即第五小区)。Optionally, the measurement report may also include first information. Optionally, the measurement report may also include eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell (i.e., the fifth cell) among the multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition.

可以理解,步骤503是步骤505的触发条件,也即是,UE一旦确定第一预设条件满足,则可向第一基站发送测量报告,如此,有助于触发第一基站尽快向UE发送切换命令消息。It can be understood that step 503 is the trigger condition for step 505. That is, once the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, it can send a measurement report to the first base station. This helps to trigger the first base station to send a handover command message to the UE as soon as possible.

步骤506,第一基站根据测量报告,从多个第二小区中选择目标小区(相当于第一小区)。Step 506: The first base station selects a target cell (equivalent to the first cell) from multiple second cells based on the measurement report.

示例性的,第一基站根据多个第二小区的信号质量信息,从多个第二小区中选择信号质量较好的第二小区作为目标小区。For example, the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality from the multiple second cells as the target cell based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells.

又示例性的,测量报告中还包括第八信息,第八信息用于指示多个第二小区中预测信息满足第二预设条件的第二小区。第一基站根据多个第二小区的信号质量信息和第八信息,选择信号质量较好且不发生第二异常事件的第二小区作为目标小区,或者,第一基站选择信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低(或发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低且概率的准确率相对较高)的第二小区作为目标小区。For example, the measurement report also includes eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell among the multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition. The first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and no second abnormal event as the target cell based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells and the eighth information, or the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event (or a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event and a relatively high accuracy of the probability) as the target cell.

步骤507,第一基站向第一小区关联的基站(即目标基站,或称为第二基站)发送切换请求消息。Step 507: The first base station sends a handover request message to the base station associated with the first cell (i.e., the target base station, or the second base station).

步骤508,第二基站向第一基站发送切换请求确认消息。具体的,第二基站生成第一小区的配置信息,向第一基站发送切换请求确认消息,切换请求确认消息中包括第一小区的配置信息。Step 508: The second base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station. Specifically, the second base station generates the configuration information of the first cell and sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station, the handover request confirmation message including the configuration information of the first cell.

步骤509,第一基站向UE发送切换命令消息。切换命令消息中包括第一小区的配置信息。Step 509: The first base station sends a handover command message to the UE. The handover command message includes the configuration information of the first cell.

步骤510,UE向第二基站发送随机接入请求消息,以请求接入到第一小区。Step 510: The UE sends a random access request message to the second base station to request access to the first cell.

上述各术语和技术方案均可参见图4相关实施例中的描述。示例性的,步骤501至步骤502中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤401;步骤503至步骤510中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤402,以及步骤402之后的实现方式一。All the terms and technical solutions mentioned above can be found in the descriptions of the relevant embodiments in Figure 4. For example, the contents not described in detail in steps 501 to 502 can be found in step 401 above; the contents not described in detail in steps 503 to 510 can be found in step 402 above, and the implementation method one after step 402.

图6为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第二个具体场景中的实现方法,UE在测量流程中,UE对UE与服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件进行预测,并在确定满足第一预设条件时,向第一基站发送测量结果。从而第一基站根据测量结果,向UE发送CHO配置信息(第六信息的一个例子)。Figure 6 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a second specific scenario. During the measurement process, the UE predicts a first abnormal event that may occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and sends the measurement result to the first base station when it determines that a first preset condition is met. The first base station then sends CHO configuration information (an example of the sixth information) to the UE based on the measurement result.

步骤601至步骤605与步骤501至步骤505类似。Steps 601 to 605 are similar to steps 501 to 505.

步骤606,第一基站根据测量报告,从多个第二小区中选择候选小区。Step 606: The first base station selects a candidate cell from multiple second cells based on the measurement report.

其中,候选小区可以是K个,K为大于1的整数。There can be K candidate cells, where K is an integer greater than 1.

示例性的,第一基站根据多个第二小区的信号质量信息,从多个第二小区中选择信号质量较好的第二小区作为候选小区。For example, the first base station selects a second cell with better signal quality from multiple second cells as a candidate cell based on the signal quality information of multiple second cells.

又示例性的,测量报告中还包括第八信息,第八信息用于指示多个第二小区中预测信息满足第二预设条件的第二小区。第一基站根据多个第二小区的信号质量信息和第八信息,选择信号质量较好且不发生第二异常事件的第二小区作为候选小区,或者,第一基站选择信号质量较好且发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低(发生第二异常事件的概率相对较低且概率的准确率相对较高)的第二小区作为候选小区。For example, the measurement report also includes eighth information, which is used to indicate the second cell among the multiple second cells whose prediction information meets the second preset condition. The first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and no second abnormal event as a candidate cell based on the signal quality information of the multiple second cells and the eighth information, or the first base station selects the second cell with better signal quality and a relatively low probability of the second abnormal event (the probability of the second abnormal event is relatively low and the accuracy of the probability is relatively high) as a candidate cell.

步骤607,第一基站向候选小区关联的基站发送切换请求消息。进一步的,为方便示出,图6中示出第二基站和第三基站,第二基站和第三基站分别与两个候选小区关联。Step 607: The first base station sends a handover request message to the base station associated with the candidate cell. Further, for clarity, Figure 6 shows a second base station and a third base station, each associated with one of the two candidate cells.

此处,假设用于管理不同候选小区的基站不同,也即是,用于管理K个候选小区的基站也是K个,且该K个基站两两不同。当然,在另外一种可能方式中,若存在某个基站管理多个候选小区的情况,基站的个数会小于候选小区的个数,例如,候选小区是10个(表示为候选小区1至候选小区10),候选小区1至候选小区5由基站1管理,候选小区6至候选小区10由基站2管理,此时,用于管理10个候选小区的基站的个数是2。为方便描述,本申请均以前一种实现方式为例说明,且该说明也可用于其他实施例中。Here, it is assumed that the base stations used to manage different candidate cells are different; that is, there are also K base stations used to manage K candidate cells, and these K base stations are all different from each other. Of course, in another possible approach, if a base station manages multiple candidate cells, the number of base stations will be less than the number of candidate cells. For example, if there are 10 candidate cells (represented as candidate cell 1 to candidate cell 10), candidate cells 1 to 5 are managed by base station 1, and candidate cells 6 to 10 are managed by base station 2. In this case, the number of base stations used to manage the 10 candidate cells is 2. For ease of description, this application uses the first implementation method as an example, and this description can also be used in other embodiments.

步骤608,候选小区关联的基站向第一基站发送切换请求确认消息,切换请求确认消息中包括候选小区的配置信息,该候选小区的配置信息用于UE接入到候选小区中。进一步的,为方便示出,图6中示出第二基站和第三基站分别向第一基站发送切换请求确认消息。Step 608: The base station associated with the candidate cell sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station. This message includes configuration information of the candidate cell, which is used by the UE to access the candidate cell. Further, for clarity, Figure 6 shows the second and third base stations sending handover request confirmation messages to the first base station.

此外,在上述步骤606中,还可以是,第一基站选择K’个候选小区。相应的,步骤607,第一基站向K’个基站分别发送切换请求消息。而在步骤608中,K’个基站中的K个基站会向第一基站发送切换请求确认消息,而其他的K’-K个基站向第一基站发送切换请求拒绝消息,例如,某个基站确定候选小区接入的UE数量超出预设数量时,向第一基站发送切换请求拒绝消息。其中,K’为大于K的正整数。该说明还可适用于其他示例中,为方便描述,如下均以第一基站与K个基站交互为例说明。Furthermore, in step 606 above, the first base station may select K’ candidate cells. Correspondingly, in step 607, the first base station sends handover request messages to each of the K’ base stations. In step 608, K of the K’ base stations send handover request confirmation messages to the first base station, while the other K’-K base stations send handover request rejection messages to the first base station. For example, if a base station determines that the number of UEs accessing a candidate cell exceeds a preset number, it sends a handover request rejection message to the first base station. Here, K’ is a positive integer greater than K. This explanation can also be applied to other examples; for ease of description, the following examples all use the interaction between the first base station and the K base stations as an example.

步骤609,第一基站向UE发送CHO配置信息。Step 609: The first base station sends CHO configuration information to the UE.

具体的,CHO配置信息中包括K个候选小区的配置信息。K个候选小区中包括第一小区。Specifically, the CHO configuration information includes the configuration information of K candidate cells. The K candidate cells include the first cell.

步骤610,UE从候选小区中选择目标小区(相当于第一小区)。Step 610: The UE selects the target cell (equivalent to the first cell) from the candidate cells.

示例性的,UE继续测量K个候选小区的下行参考信号,以得到K个候选小区的信号质量信息,根据K个候选小区的信号质量信息,从K个候选小区中选择信号质量较好的候选小区,作为第一小区。For example, the UE continues to measure the downlink reference signals of K candidate cells to obtain the signal quality information of the K candidate cells. Based on the signal quality information of the K candidate cells, the UE selects the candidate cell with better signal quality from the K candidate cells as the first cell.

又示例性的,在步骤609中,每个候选小区的配置信息还可包括候选小区的执行触发条件,该候选小区的执行触发条件可以是第一基站根据该候选小区的信号质量信息确定的。如此,在步骤610中,UE继续测量K个候选小区的下行参考信号,以得到K个候选小区的信号质量信息,随后,UE能够从K个候选小区中,选择信号质量信息满足候选小区的执行触发条件的候选小区,以作为目标小区。For example, in step 609, the configuration information of each candidate cell may further include the execution triggering condition of the candidate cell, which may be determined by the first base station based on the signal quality information of the candidate cell. Thus, in step 610, the UE continues to measure the downlink reference signals of the K candidate cells to obtain the signal quality information of the K candidate cells. Subsequently, the UE can select the candidate cell whose signal quality information meets the execution triggering condition of the candidate cell from the K candidate cells as the target cell.

步骤611,UE向第二基站发送随机接入请求消息,以请求接入到第一小区。Step 611: The UE sends a random access request message to the second base station to request access to the first cell.

其中,第二基站与第一小区关联。The second base station is associated with the first cell.

上述各术语和技术方案均可参见图4相关实施例中的描述。示例性的,步骤601至步骤602中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤401;步骤603至步骤611中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤402,以及步骤402之后的实现方式二。All the terms and technical solutions mentioned above can be found in the descriptions of the relevant embodiments in Figure 4. For example, the contents not described in detail in steps 601 to 602 can be found in step 401 above; the contents not described in detail in steps 603 to 611 can be found in step 402 above, and the second implementation method after step 402.

图7为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第三个具体场景中的实现方法,UE对UE与服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件进行预测,并在确定满足第一预设条件时,自行发起RRC重建立流程。Figure 7 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a third specific scenario. The UE predicts the occurrence of a first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and initiates an RRC re-establishment process when it is determined that the first preset condition is met.

步骤701,第一基站向UE发送第七信息。相应的,UE接收来自第一基站的第七信息。Step 701: The first base station sends the seventh information to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE receives the seventh information from the first base station.

其中,步骤701为可选步骤,在另外的可能方式中,UE还可预配置(或预定义)有第七信息。Step 701 is an optional step. In other possible ways, the UE may also pre-configure (or pre-define) the seventh information.

其中,第七信息包括第一预设条件、第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的一项或多项。The seventh information includes one or more of the first preset condition, the first instruction information, and the second instruction information.

示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件。For example, the first preset condition is that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

又示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值。For example, the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold.

再示例性的,第一预设条件是UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值。For another example, the first preset condition is that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.

第一指示信息用于指示第一异常事件,第一异常事件至少包括RLF和/或第一HOF。The first indication information is used to indicate a first abnormal event, which includes at least an RLF and/or a first HOF.

第二指示信息用于指示至少一个测量项,至少一个测量项包括:测量标识、测量对象、报告配置、或测量事件中的至少一个。The second indication information is used to indicate at least one measurement item, which includes at least one of the following: measurement identifier, measurement object, report configuration, or measurement event.

步骤702,UE根据模型确定第一信息。Step 702: The UE determines the first information based on the model.

其中,第一信息是UE与服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息。The first information is the prediction information of the first abnormal event that will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future.

步骤703,UE根据第一信息,确定第一预设条件满足。Step 703: The UE determines that the first preset condition is met based on the first information.

示例性的,UE确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件时,确定第一预设条件满足。For example, when the UE determines that the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, it determines that the first preset condition is met.

又示例性的,UE在确定第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。For another example, when the UE determines that the probability of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, the UE determines that the first preset condition is met.

再示例性的,UE在确定在第一信息指示UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定第一预设条件满足。For another example, when the UE determines that the first preset condition is met, the probability that the first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability that the first abnormal event will occur in the UE and the serving cell in the future is greater than a second threshold.

步骤704,UE测量多个第三小区的下行参考信号,以得到多个第三小区的信号质量信息,根据多个第三小区的信号质量信息,从多个第三小区中选择信号质量较好的第三小区作为第一小区。Step 704: The UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple third cells to obtain signal quality information of multiple third cells. Based on the signal quality information of multiple third cells, the UE selects the third cell with better signal quality from the multiple third cells as the first cell.

步骤705,UE向第二基站发送RRC重建立请求消息(第二信息的一个例子),以接入到第一小区中。Step 705: The UE sends an RRC re-establishment request message (an example of the second information) to the second base station to access the first cell.

其中,第二基站与第一小区关联。The second base station is associated with the first cell.

进一步的,RRC重建立请求消息中可携带重建原因信息。Furthermore, the RRC Re-establishment Request message can carry reconstruction reason information.

示例性的,该重建原因信息中包括UE与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,或该重建原因信息是UE预测与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件,或该重建原因信息是UE通过模型,预测与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件,或该重建原因信息是UE预测与服务小区将来发生RLF等。For example, the reconstruction reason information may include prediction information of a first abnormal event occurring between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE predicting that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE predicting that a first abnormal event will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future through a model, or the reconstruction reason information may be the UE predicting that an RLF will occur between the UE and the serving cell in the future, etc.

上述各术语和技术方案均可参见图4相关实施例中的描述。示例性的,步骤701至步骤702中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤401;步骤703至步骤705中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤402,以及步骤402之后的实现方式三。All the terms and technical solutions mentioned above can be found in the descriptions of the relevant embodiments in Figure 4. For example, the contents not described in detail in steps 701 to 702 can be found in step 401 above; the contents not described in detail in steps 703 to 705 can be found in step 402 above, and the implementation method three after step 402.

图8为本申请示例性提供的通信方法在第四个具体场景中的实现方法,UE对UE与服务小区之间将来发生第一异常事件进行预测,并在确定满足第一预设条件时,选择某个候选小区进行切换。Figure 8 illustrates the implementation of the communication method provided in this application in a fourth specific scenario. The UE predicts the occurrence of a first abnormal event between the UE and the serving cell in the future, and selects a candidate cell for handover when it is determined that the first preset condition is met.

步骤801至步骤803与步骤701至步骤703类似。Steps 801 to 803 are similar to steps 701 to 703.

步骤804,第一基站向UE发送CHO配置信息(第三信息的一个例子)。Step 804: The first base station sends CHO configuration information (an example of third information) to the UE.

其中,步骤804发生于步骤805之前,但不限定步骤804与步骤801(或步骤802/步骤803)之间的先后顺序。示例性的,第七消息和CHO配置信息可以携带于同一个RRC重配置消息中(此时,可认为步骤801和步骤804同时发生),也可以携带于不同的RRC重配置消息中。Step 804 occurs before step 805, but the order of step 804 with step 801 (or step 802/step 803) is not limited. For example, the seventh message and CHO configuration information can be carried in the same RRC reconfiguration message (in which case, steps 801 and 804 can be considered to occur simultaneously), or they can be carried in different RRC reconfiguration messages.

具体的,CHO配置信息中包括多个第四小区的配置信息。多个第四小区中包括第一小区。Specifically, the CHO configuration information includes configuration information for multiple fourth cells. These multiple fourth cells include the first cell.

在一个可能示例中,第一基站向UE发送CHO配置信息之前,第一基站针对每个第四小区,向该第四小区关联的基站发送切换请求消息,随后,该第四小区关联的基站向第一基站发送切换请求确认消息,切换请求确认消息中包括第四小区的配置信息,该第四小区的配置信息用于UE接入到第四小区中。如此,第一基站即获取到多个第四小区的配置信息,进而得到CHO配置信息。In one possible example, before the first base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE, the first base station sends a handover request message to the base station associated with each fourth cell. Subsequently, the base station associated with the fourth cell sends a handover request confirmation message to the first base station. The handover request confirmation message includes the configuration information of the fourth cell, which is used by the UE to access the fourth cell. In this way, the first base station obtains the configuration information of multiple fourth cells, and thus obtains the CHO configuration information.

步骤805,UE根据CHO配置信息,从多个第四小区中选择第一小区。Step 805: The UE selects the first cell from multiple fourth cells based on the CHO configuration information.

示例性的,UE测量多个第四小区的下行参考信号,以得到多个第四小区的信号质量信息,根据多个第四小区的信号质量信息,从多个第四小区中选择信号质量较好的第四小区,作为第一小区。For example, the UE measures the downlink reference signals of multiple fourth cells to obtain signal quality information of multiple fourth cells, and selects the fourth cell with better signal quality from the multiple fourth cells as the first cell based on the signal quality information of multiple fourth cells.

需要指出的是,当UE针对每个第四小区的配置信息,确定每个第四小区的下行参考信号(或信号质量信息)不满足其对应的执行触发条件时,UE也可不考虑执行触发条件,而从多个第四小区中选择第一小区,从而避免UE未选择出第一小区,而影响UE通信的稳定性。It should be noted that when the UE determines that the downlink reference signal (or signal quality information) of each fourth cell does not meet its corresponding execution triggering condition based on the configuration information of each fourth cell, the UE may also disregard the execution triggering condition and select the first cell from multiple fourth cells, thereby avoiding the UE failing to select the first cell and affecting the stability of UE communication.

步骤806,UE向第二基站发送随机接入请求消息,以请求接入到第一小区。Step 806: The UE sends a random access request message to the second base station to request access to the first cell.

其中,第二基站与第一小区关联。The second base station is associated with the first cell.

上述各术语和技术方案均可参见图4相关实施例中的描述。示例性的,步骤801至步骤802中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤401;步骤803至步骤806中未详尽描述的内容,可参见上述步骤402,以及步骤402之后的实现方式四。All the terms and technical solutions mentioned above can be found in the descriptions of the relevant embodiments in Figure 4. For example, the contents not described in detail in steps 801 to 802 can be found in step 401 above; the contents not described in detail in steps 803 to 806 can be found in step 402 above, and the fourth implementation method after step 402.

需要补充的是,图4至图8相关实施例中,基站的处理操作可以由CU执行,基站的收发操作可以由DU或RU执行;或者,基站的处理操作可以由CU-CP执行,基站的收发操作可以由DU或RU执行。It should be added that, in the embodiments of Figures 4 to 8, the base station processing operation can be performed by the CU, and the base station transmit and receive operation can be performed by the DU or RU; or, the base station processing operation can be performed by the CU-CP, and the base station transmit and receive operation can be performed by the DU or RU.

结合图5中第一基站和UE的交互流程:Referring to the interaction flow between the first base station and the UE in Figure 5:

例如,CU可生成测量配置,CU可以将测量配置发送给DU。DU可以将测量配置发送给UE,或者DU可将测量配置发送给RU,由RU发送给UE。类似的,DU可以接收来自UE的测量报告,或者,RU可以接收来自UE的测量报告,将测量报告发送给DU。随后,DU再将测量报告发送给CU。由CU根据测量报告,确定切换命令消息。For example, the CU can generate a measurement configuration, which it can then send to the DU. The DU can then send the measurement configuration to the UE, or the DU can send the measurement configuration to the RU, which in turn sends it to the UE. Similarly, the DU can receive measurement reports from the UE, or the RU can receive measurement reports from the UE and send them to the DU. Subsequently, the DU sends the measurement reports back to the CU. The CU then determines the handover command message based on the measurement reports.

再例如,CU-CP可以生成测量配置,CU-CP可以将测量配置发送给DU。DU可以将测量配置发送给UE,或者DU可以将测量配置发送给RU,由RU发送给UE。类似的,DU可以接收来自UE的测量报告,或者,RU可以接收来自UE的测量报告,将测量报告发送给DU。随后,DU再将测量报告发送给CU-CP。由CU-CP根据测量报告,确定切换命令消息。For example, the CU-CP can generate a measurement configuration, which it can then send to the DU. The DU can then send the measurement configuration to the UE, or it can send it to the RU, which in turn sends it to the UE. Similarly, the DU can receive measurement reports from the UE, or the RU can receive measurement reports from the UE and send them to the DU. The DU then sends the measurement reports back to the CU-CP. The CU-CP determines the handover command message based on the measurement reports.

当然,CU、DU、RU、CU-CP还可以执行其他操作,本申请不再一一举例。Of course, CU, DU, RU, and CU-CP can also perform other operations, which will not be listed in this application.

进一步的,在O-RAN场景中,上述CU执行的操作可以由O-CU执行,DU执行的操作可以由O-DU执行,RU执行的操作可以由O-RU执行,CU-CP执行的操作可以由O-CU-CP执行。结合图5中流程,图9为本申请示例性提供的一种O-RAN场景中第一基站内各模块的交互的流程示意图。Furthermore, in the O-RAN scenario, the operations performed by the CU can be performed by the O-CU, the operations performed by the DU can be performed by the O-DU, the operations performed by the RU can be performed by the O-RU, and the operations performed by the CU-CP can be performed by the O-CU-CP. Referring to the flow in Figure 5, Figure 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction flow of various modules within the first base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application.

结合图5中第二基站和UE的交互流程:Referring to the interaction flow between the second base station and the UE in Figure 5:

例如,DU可以接收来自UE的随机接入请求消息,或者,RU可以接收来自UE的随机接入请求消息,将随机接入请求消息发送给DU。随后,DU再将随机接入请求消息发送给CU。For example, the DU can receive a random access request message from the UE, or the RU can receive a random access request message from the UE and send the random access request message to the DU. Subsequently, the DU sends the random access request message to the CU.

再例如,DU可以接收来自UE的随机接入请求消息,或者,RU可以接收来自UE的随机接入请求消息,将随机接入请求消息发送给DU。随后,DU再将随机接入请求消息发送给CU-CP。For example, the DU can receive a random access request message from the UE, or the RU can receive a random access request message from the UE and send the random access request message to the DU. Subsequently, the DU sends the random access request message to the CU-CP.

当然,CU、DU、RU、CU-CP还可以执行其他操作,本申请不再一一举例。Of course, CU, DU, RU, and CU-CP can also perform other operations, which will not be listed in this application.

进一步的,在O-RAN场景中,上述CU执行的操作可以由O-CU执行,DU执行的操作可以由O-DU执行,RU执行的操作可以由O-RU执行,CU-CP执行的操作可以由O-CU-CP执行。结合图5中流程,图10为本申请示例性提供的一种O-RAN场景中第二基站内各模块的交互的流程示意图。Furthermore, in the O-RAN scenario, the operations performed by the CU can be performed by the O-CU, the operations performed by the DU can be performed by the O-DU, the operations performed by the RU can be performed by the O-RU, and the operations performed by the CU-CP can be performed by the O-CU-CP. Referring to the flow in Figure 5, Figure 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating the interaction flow of various modules within a second base station in an O-RAN scenario provided by this application.

需要说明的是,上述各个流程图的步骤编号仅为执行流程的一种示例,并不构成对步骤执行的先后顺序的限制,本申请实施例中相互之间没有时序依赖关系的步骤之间没有严格的执行顺序。各个流程图中所示意的步骤并非全部是必须执行的步骤,可以根据实际需要在各个流程图的基础上删除部分步骤,或者也可以根据实际需要在各个流程图的基础上增添其它可能的步骤。It should be noted that the step numbers in the above flowcharts are merely examples of the execution flow and do not constitute a restriction on the order of step execution. In this embodiment, there is no strict execution order between steps that do not have temporal dependencies. Not all steps shown in the flowcharts are mandatory. Some steps can be deleted from the flowcharts as needed, or other possible steps can be added to the flowcharts as needed.

上述侧重描述了各实现方式之间的差异之处,除差异之处的其它内容,各实现方式之间可以相互参照;此外,同一实现方式中,不同示例之间也可以相互参照。The above focuses on describing the differences between the various implementation methods. Apart from the differences, the implementation methods can be referenced from each other. In addition, different examples of the same implementation method can also be referenced from each other.

可以理解的是,为了实现上述实施例中功能,基站和UE包括了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及方法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件相结合的形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用场景和设计约束条件。It is understood that, in order to implement the functions in the above embodiments, the base station and UE include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to perform each function. Those skilled in the art should readily recognize that, based on the units and method steps described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in this application, this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application scenario and design constraints of the technical solution.

图11和图12为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中UE或基站的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请的实施例中,该通信装置可以是如图1A所示的UE120a-120j中的一个,也可以是如图1A所示的基站110a或110b,还可以是应用于UE或基站的模块(如芯片)。Figures 11 and 12 are schematic diagrams of possible communication devices provided in embodiments of this application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the UE or base station in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiments of this application, the communication device can be one of the UEs 120a-120j shown in Figure 1A, or the base station 110a or 110b shown in Figure 1A, or a module (such as a chip) applied to the UE or base station.

如图11所示,通信装置1100包括处理模块1101和收发模块1102。通信装置1100用于实现上述图4至图8所示的方法实施例中UE或基站的功能。As shown in Figure 11, the communication device 1100 includes a processing module 1101 and a transceiver module 1102. The communication device 1100 is used to implement the functions of the UE or base station in the method embodiments shown in Figures 4 to 8 above.

当通信装置1100用于实现图4至图8所示的方法实施例中UE的功能时:When the communication device 1100 is used to implement the functions of the UE in the method embodiments shown in Figures 4 to 8:

处理模块1101,用于获取第一信息,第一信息为用于指示终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息;在根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,在第一时间之前接入第一小区,第一时间是预测的第一异常事件的发生时间;其中,第一小区与服务小区不同。The processing module 1101 is used to acquire first information, which is prediction information for indicating that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future; when a preset condition is determined to be met according to the first information, the terminal device accesses the first cell before a first time, where the first time is the predicted occurrence time of the first abnormal event; wherein, the first cell is different from the serving cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在接入第一小区时,具体用于:控制收发模块1102向第一接入网设备发送测量报告,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息,多个第二小区中包括第一小区,第一接入网设备与服务小区关联;控制收发模块1102接收来自第一接入网设备的第一小区的配置信息;以及,根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。In one possible implementation, when the processing module 1101 accesses the first cell, it is specifically configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to send a measurement report to the first access network device, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, of which the first cell is included, and the first access network device is associated with the serving cell; control the transceiver module 1102 to receive configuration information of the first cell from the first access network device; and, according to the configuration information of the first cell, switch to the first cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在接入第一小区时,具体用于:控制收发模块1102向第二接入网设备发送第二信息;第二信息用于指示接入第一小区,第一小区是针对多个第三小区的信号进行测量确定的,多个第三小区中包括第一小区,第二接入网设备与第一小区关联。In one possible implementation, when the processing module 1101 accesses the first cell, it is specifically used to: control the transceiver module 1102 to send second information to the second access network device; the second information is used to indicate access to the first cell, the first cell is determined by measuring the signals of multiple third cells, the multiple third cells include the first cell, and the second access network device is associated with the first cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在接入第一小区之前,还用于:控制收发模块1102接收来自第一接入网设备的第三信息,第三信息指示多个第四小区的配置信息,第一接入网设备与服务小区关联;处理模块1101在接入第一小区时,具体用于:从多个第四小区中确定第一小区,第一小区是针对多个第四小区的信号进行测量确定的;根据第一小区的配置信息,切换到第一小区。In one possible implementation, before accessing the first cell, the processing module 1101 is further configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to receive third information from the first access network device, the third information indicating the configuration information of multiple fourth cells, and the first access network device being associated with the serving cell; when accessing the first cell, the processing module 1101 is specifically configured to: determine the first cell from the multiple fourth cells, the first cell being determined by measuring the signals of the multiple fourth cells; and switch to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,具体用于:在第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件时,确定预设条件满足。In one possible implementation, when the processing module 1101 determines that the preset condition is met based on the first information, it is specifically used to: determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur in the future.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,具体用于:在第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定预设条件满足。In one possible implementation, when the processing module 1101 determines that the preset condition is met based on the first information, it is specifically used to: determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than the first threshold.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,具体用于:在第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定预设条件满足。In one possible implementation, when the processing module 1101 determines that the preset condition is met based on the first information, it is specifically used to: determine that the preset condition is met when the first information indicates that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a first threshold and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a second threshold.

在一个可能实现方式中,处理模块1101在获取第一信息时,具体用于:控制收发模块1102接收来自第一接入网设备的第四信息,第四信息用于指示至少一个测量项,第一接入网设备与服务小区关联;测量服务小区的参考信号,得到至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果;根据至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果,确定第一信息。In one possible implementation, when the processing module 1101 acquires the first information, it is specifically configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to receive fourth information from the first access network device, the fourth information being used to indicate at least one measurement item, the first access network device being associated with the serving cell; measure the reference signal of the serving cell to obtain the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item; and determine the first information based on the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item.

当通信装置1100用于实现图5或图6所示的方法实施例中基站的功能时:When the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the base station in the method embodiment shown in FIG5 or FIG6:

处理模块1101用于,控制收发模块1102接收测量报告,测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息,测量报告是终端设备在根据第一信息确定预测条件满足时发送的,第一信息为用于指示终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,接入网设备与服务小区关联;以及,控制收发模块1102发送第一小区的配置信息或一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,第一小区为多个第二小区中的一个小区,第一小区的配置信息或一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息是根据测量报告确定的;第一小区的配置信息用于终端设备接入到第一小区,一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息用于终端设备从一个或多个候选小区中选择并接入到第一小区。The processing module 1101 is configured to: control the transceiver module 1102 to receive a measurement report, the measurement report including signal quality information of multiple second cells, the measurement report being sent by the terminal device when it determines that the prediction conditions are met based on first information, the first information being prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future, and the access network device being associated with the serving cell; and control the transceiver module 1102 to send configuration information of the first cell or configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells, the first cell being one of multiple second cells, the configuration information of the first cell or the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being determined based on the measurement report; the configuration information of the first cell being used by the terminal device to access the first cell, and the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells being used by the terminal device to select from one or more candidate cells and access the first cell.

在一个可能实现方式中,收发模块1102在发送第一小区的配置信息时,具体用于:发送第五信息,第五信息包括第一小区的配置信息,第五信息用于指示终端设备根据第一小区的配置信息切换到第一小区;或者,收发模块1102在发送一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息时,具体用于:发送第六信息,第六信息包括一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,第六信息用于指示终端设备根据一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,从一个或多个候选小区中选择第一小区,并切换到第一小区,一个或多个候选小区包括第一小区。In one possible implementation, when the transceiver module 1102 sends the configuration information of the first cell, it is specifically used to: send fifth information, the fifth information including the configuration information of the first cell, the fifth information being used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell; or, when the transceiver module 1102 sends the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells respectively, it is specifically used to: send sixth information, the sixth information including the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells respectively, the sixth information being used to instruct the terminal device to select the first cell from one or more candidate cells according to the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells respectively, and switch to the first cell, the one or more candidate cells including the first cell.

有关上述处理模块1101和收发模块1102更详细的描述可以直接参考图12所示的方法实施例中相关描述直接得到,这里不加赘述。A more detailed description of the above-mentioned processing module 1101 and transceiver module 1102 can be obtained directly from the relevant description in the method embodiment shown in Figure 12, and will not be repeated here.

如图12所示,通信装置1200包括处理器1210和接口电路1220。处理器1210和接口电路1220之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,接口电路1220可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选的,通信装置1200还可以包括存储器1230,用于存储处理器1210执行的指令或存储处理器1210运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器1210运行指令后产生的数据。As shown in Figure 12, the communication device 1200 includes a processor 1210 and an interface circuit 1220. The processor 1210 and the interface circuit 1220 are coupled to each other. It is understood that the interface circuit 1220 can be a transceiver or an input/output interface. Optionally, the communication device 1200 may also include a memory 1230 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1210, or storing input data required by the processor 1210 to execute instructions, or storing data generated after the processor 1210 executes instructions.

当通信装置1200用于实现图4至图8任一图所示的方法时,处理器1210用于实现上述处理模块1101的功能,接口电路1220用于实现上述收发模块1102的功能。When the communication device 1200 is used to implement the method shown in any of Figures 4 to 8, the processor 1210 is used to implement the function of the processing module 1101, and the interface circuit 1220 is used to implement the function of the transceiver module 1102.

当上述通信装置为应用于UE的芯片时,该UE芯片实现上述方法实施例中UE的功能。该UE芯片从UE中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是基站发送给UE的;或者,该UE芯片向UE中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是UE发送给基站的。When the aforementioned communication device is a chip applied to the UE, the UE chip implements the functions of the UE in the above method embodiments. The UE chip receives information from other modules in the UE (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), which is sent to the UE by the base station; or, the UE chip sends information to other modules in the UE (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), which is sent to the base station by the UE.

当上述通信装置为应用于基站的模块时,该基站模块实现上述方法实施例中基站的功能。该基站模块从基站中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是UE发送给基站的;或者,该基站模块向基站中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是基站发送给UE的。这里的基站模块可以是基站的基带芯片,也可以是DU或其他模块,这里的DU可以是O-RAN架构下的DU。When the aforementioned communication device is a module applied to a base station, the base station module implements the functions of the base station in the above method embodiments. The base station module receives information from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the base station, which is information sent by the UE to the base station; or, the base station module sends information to other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the base station, which is information sent by the base station to the UE. Here, the base station module can be the baseband chip of the base station, or it can be a DU or other modules, where the DU can be a DU under the O-RAN architecture.

可以理解的是,本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理模块(central processing unit,CPU),还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件,硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器,也可以是任何常规的处理器。It is understood that the processor in the embodiments of this application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. A general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.

本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现,也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于基站或UE中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于基站或UE中。The method steps in the embodiments of this application can be implemented in hardware or by a processor executing software instructions. The software instructions can consist of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, registers, hard disks, portable hard disks, CD-ROMs, or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor, enabling the processor to read information from and write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be a component of the processor. The processor and storage medium can reside in an ASIC. Alternatively, the ASIC can reside in a base station or UE. Of course, the processor and storage medium can also exist as discrete components in the base station or UE.

在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘;还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质,或包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。In the above embodiments, implementation can be achieved, in whole or in part, through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented, in whole or in part, as a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When a computer program or instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions of the embodiments of this application are performed. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device. The computer program or instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transferred from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, a computer program or instructions can be transferred from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired or wireless means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media. The available medium can be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, hard disk, or magnetic tape; it can also be an optical medium, such as a digital video optical disc; or it can be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid-state drive. The computer-readable storage medium may be a volatile or non-volatile storage medium, or a combination of both.

在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified or in case of logical conflict, the terminology and/or descriptions of different embodiments are consistent and can be referenced by each other. The technical features of different embodiments can be combined to form new embodiments according to their inherent logical relationship.

本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;在本申请的公式中,字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。“包括A,B和C中的至少一个”可以表示:包括A;包括B;包括C;包括A和B;包括A和C;包括B和C;包括A、B和C。In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "more than one" means two or more. "And/or" describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, A and/or B can represent: A alone, A and B simultaneously, or B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. In the textual description of this application, the character "/" generally indicates an "or" relationship between the preceding and following related objects; in the formulas of this application, the character "/" indicates a "division" relationship between the preceding and following related objects. "Including at least one of A, B, and C" can mean: including A; including B; including C; including A and B; including A and C; including B and C; including A, B, and C.

可以理解的是,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。It is understood that the various numerical designations used in the embodiments of this application are merely for descriptive convenience and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of this application. The order of the process numbers described above does not imply the order of execution; the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic.

Claims (23)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于终端设备,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a terminal device and includes: 获取第一信息,所述第一信息为用于指示终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息;Obtain first information, which is prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future; 在根据所述第一信息,确定预设条件满足时,在第一时间之前接入第一小区,所述第一时间是预测的所述第一异常事件的发生时间;When the preset conditions are met based on the first information, the first cell is accessed before the first time, where the first time is the predicted time of occurrence of the first abnormal event. 其中,所述第一小区与所述服务小区不同。The first cell is different from the serving cell. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入第一小区,包括:The method as described in claim 1, wherein accessing the first cell comprises: 向第一接入网设备发送测量报告,所述测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息,所述多个第二小区中包括所述第一小区,所述第一接入网设备与所述服务小区关联;A measurement report is sent to a first access network device. The measurement report includes signal quality information of multiple second cells, including the first cell. The first access network device is associated with the serving cell. 接收来自所述第一接入网设备的所述第一小区的配置信息;Receive configuration information of the first cell from the first access network device; 根据所述第一小区的配置信息,切换到所述第一小区。Switch to the first cell based on the configuration information of the first cell. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量报告中还包括所述多个第二小区分别作为所述终端设备切换的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。The method as described in claim 2, wherein the measurement report further includes prediction information of a second abnormal event occurring when the plurality of second cells are respectively used as target cells for handover of the terminal device. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二异常事件包括如下一项或多项:切换失败、无线链路失败、乒乓切换、非必要切换、切换过晚、或切换过早。The method as described in claim 3, wherein the second abnormal event includes one or more of the following: handover failure, wireless link failure, ping-pong handover, unnecessary handover, handover too late, or handover too early. 如权利要求2-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量报告中还包括所述第一信息。The method according to any one of claims 2-4, wherein the measurement report further includes the first information. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入第一小区,包括:The method as described in claim 1, wherein accessing the first cell comprises: 向第二接入网设备发送第二信息;Send the second information to the second access network device; 所述第二信息用于指示接入所述第一小区,所述第一小区是针对多个第三小区的信号进行测量确定的,所述多个第三小区中包括所述第一小区,所述第二接入网设备与所述第一小区关联。The second information is used to indicate access to the first cell, which is determined by measuring the signals of a plurality of third cells, including the first cell, and the second access network device is associated with the first cell. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入第一小区之前,还包括:The method as described in claim 1, characterized in that, before accessing the first cell, it further includes: 接收来自第一接入网设备的第三信息,所述第三信息指示多个第四小区的配置信息,所述第一接入网设备与所述服务小区关联;Receive third information from a first access network device, the third information indicating configuration information of a plurality of fourth cells, the first access network device being associated with the serving cell; 所述接入第一小区,包括:The access to the first cell includes: 从所述多个第四小区中确定第一小区,所述第一小区是针对所述多个第四小区的信号进行测量确定的;A first cell is determined from the plurality of fourth cells, wherein the first cell is determined by measuring the signals of the plurality of fourth cells; 根据所述第一小区的配置信息,切换到所述第一小区。Switch to the first cell based on the configuration information of the first cell. 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足,包括:The method as described in any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that determining that the preset condition is met based on the first information includes: 在所述第一信息指示将来发生第一异常事件时,确定所述预设条件满足。When the first information indicates that a first abnormal event will occur in the future, it is determined that the preset condition is met. 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足,包括:The method as described in any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that determining that the preset condition is met based on the first information includes: 在所述第一信息指示所述将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值时,确定所述预设条件满足。When the first information indicates that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than the first threshold, it is determined that the preset condition is met. 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第一信息,确定预设条件满足,包括:The method as described in any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that determining that the preset condition is met based on the first information includes: 在所述第一信息指示所述将来发生第一异常事件的概率大于第一阈值,且所述将来发生第一异常事件的概率的准确率大于第二阈值时,确定所述预设条件满足。When the first information indicates that the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a first threshold, and the accuracy of the probability of the first abnormal event occurring in the future is greater than a second threshold, it is determined that the preset condition is met. 如权利要求1-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一异常事件包括无线链路失败。The method according to any one of claims 1-10, wherein the first abnormal event includes a wireless link failure. 如权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-11, wherein obtaining the first information includes: 接收来自第一接入网设备的第四信息,所述第四信息用于指示至少一个测量项,所述第一接入网设备与所述服务小区关联;Receive fourth information from a first access network device, the fourth information being used to indicate at least one measurement item, the first access network device being associated with the serving cell; 测量所述服务小区的参考信号,得到所述至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果;Measure the reference signal of the serving cell to obtain the measurement results corresponding to each of the at least one measurement item; 根据所述至少一个测量项分别对应的测量结果,确定所述第一信息。The first information is determined based on the measurement results corresponding to the at least one measurement item. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个测量项包括:测量标识、测量对象、报告配置、或测量事件中的至少一个。The method of claim 12, wherein the at least one measurement item includes at least one of: measurement identifier, measurement object, report configuration, or measurement event. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于接入网设备,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to an access network device, comprising: 接收测量报告,所述测量报告中包括多个第二小区的信号质量信息,所述测量报告是终端设备在根据第一信息确定预测条件满足时发送的,所述第一信息为用于指示所述终端设备与服务小区将来发生第一异常事件的预测信息,所述接入网设备与所述服务小区关联;The device receives a measurement report, which includes signal quality information of multiple second cells. The measurement report is sent by the terminal device when it determines that the prediction conditions are met based on first information. The first information is prediction information used to indicate that a first abnormal event will occur between the terminal device and the serving cell in the future. The access network device is associated with the serving cell. 发送第一小区的配置信息或一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,所述第一小区为所述多个第二小区中的一个小区,所述第一小区的配置信息或所述一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息是根据所述测量报告确定的;所述第一小区的配置信息用于所述终端设备接入到所述第一小区,所述一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息用于所述终端设备从所述一个或多个候选小区中选择并接入到所述第一小区。The configuration information of the first cell or the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells are sent. The first cell is one of the plurality of second cells. The configuration information of the first cell or the configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells is determined according to the measurement report. The configuration information of the first cell is used for the terminal device to access the first cell. The configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells is used for the terminal device to select from one or more candidate cells and access the first cell. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述发送第一小区的配置信息,包括:The method as described in claim 14, wherein sending the configuration information of the first cell includes: 发送第五信息,所述第五信息包括所述第一小区的配置信息,所述第五信息用于指示所述终端设备根据所述第一小区的配置信息切换到所述第一小区;或者,Send a fifth message, the fifth message including the configuration information of the first cell, the fifth message being used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first cell according to the configuration information of the first cell; or, 所述发送一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,包括:Sending configuration information corresponding to one or more candidate cells includes: 发送第六信息,所述第六信息包括所述一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,所述第六信息用于指示所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个候选小区分别对应的配置信息,从所述一个或多个候选小区中选择所述第一小区,并切换到所述第一小区,所述一个或多个候选小区包括所述第一小区。Send a sixth message, the sixth message including configuration information corresponding to the one or more candidate cells respectively, the sixth message being used to instruct the terminal device to select the first cell from the one or more candidate cells according to the configuration information corresponding to the one or more candidate cells respectively, and switch to the first cell, the one or more candidate cells including the first cell. 如权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量报告中还包括所述多个第二小区分别作为所述终端设备切换的目标小区时发生第二异常事件的预测信息。The method as described in claim 14 or 15 is characterized in that the measurement report further includes prediction information of a second abnormal event occurring when the plurality of second cells are respectively used as target cells for handover of the terminal device. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二异常事件包括如下一项或多项:切换失败、无线链路失败、乒乓切换、非必要切换、切换过晚、或切换过早。The method as described in claim 16, wherein the second abnormal event includes one or more of the following: handover failure, wireless link failure, ping-pong handover, unnecessary handover, handover too late, or handover too early. 如权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量报告中还包括所述第一信息。The method according to any one of claims 14-17, wherein the measurement report further includes the first information. 如权利要求14-18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一异常事件包括无线链路失败。The method according to any one of claims 14-18, wherein the first abnormal event includes a wireless link failure. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1-13任一项所述方法的模块,或包括用于执行如权利要求14-19任一项所述方法的模块。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a module for performing the method as described in any one of claims 1-13, or includes a module for performing the method as described in any one of claims 14-19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和接口电路,所述接口电路用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置,所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法,或所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求14-19任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit being configured to receive signals from other communication devices outside the communication device and transmit them to the processor, or to send signals from the processor to other communication devices outside the communication device, the processor being configured to implement the method as described in any one of claims 1-13 via logic circuits or executable code instructions, or the processor being configured to implement the method as described in any one of claims 14-19 via logic circuits or executable code instructions. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,实现如权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法,或实现如权利要求14-19任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the storage medium stores a computer program or instructions that, when executed by a communication device, implement the method as described in any one of claims 1-13, or implement the method as described in any one of claims 14-19. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,实现如权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法,或实现如权利要求14-19任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes a computer program or instructions, which, when executed by a communication device, implement the method as described in any one of claims 1-13, or implement the method as described in any one of claims 14-19.
PCT/CN2025/071993 2024-05-09 2025-01-13 Communication method and apparatus Pending WO2025232279A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410574520.7 2024-05-09
CN202410574520.7A CN120935684A (en) 2024-05-09 2024-05-09 A communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025232279A1 true WO2025232279A1 (en) 2025-11-13

Family

ID=97580868

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2025/071993 Pending WO2025232279A1 (en) 2024-05-09 2025-01-13 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN120935684A (en)
WO (1) WO2025232279A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115190550A (en) * 2021-04-02 2022-10-14 华为技术有限公司 Cell switching method and device
CN116034599A (en) * 2020-07-03 2023-04-28 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method, UE and network node for failure prediction
US20230189085A1 (en) * 2021-12-15 2023-06-15 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for cell change prediction in communication system
CN116744375A (en) * 2022-03-01 2023-09-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 Cell switching method, device and user equipment
CN116980990A (en) * 2022-04-21 2023-10-31 维沃移动通信有限公司 Information transmission method, device, terminal, network side equipment and storage medium

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116034599A (en) * 2020-07-03 2023-04-28 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method, UE and network node for failure prediction
CN115190550A (en) * 2021-04-02 2022-10-14 华为技术有限公司 Cell switching method and device
US20230189085A1 (en) * 2021-12-15 2023-06-15 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for cell change prediction in communication system
CN116744375A (en) * 2022-03-01 2023-09-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 Cell switching method, device and user equipment
CN116980990A (en) * 2022-04-21 2023-10-31 维沃移动通信有限公司 Information transmission method, device, terminal, network side equipment and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN120935684A (en) 2025-11-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11051219B2 (en) Method and apparatus for controlling mobility for cell having small cell service area in mobile communication system
WO2020001575A1 (en) Iab node switching method, iab node and host base station
CN114616862B (en) Communication method, device and system
TWI423715B (en) Method of handling system information reception and related communication device
US20240334273A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2023125200A1 (en) Cell handover method and apparatus
US20220361071A1 (en) Conditional Handover for Wireless Networks
WO2019223696A1 (en) Communication method and device
CN119631473A (en) Cell switching method, device, equipment and storage medium
WO2023240496A1 (en) Communication method, terminal, and network device
WO2024152978A1 (en) Measurement prediction method and apparatus, and terminal device, network device and chip
WO2019127260A1 (en) Method and apparatus for cell handover and terminal identification
WO2022067796A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
WO2025232279A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025232494A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020191674A1 (en) Measurement report reporting method, and related product
TW202333511A (en) Informaiton recording method, commuications apparatus, computer storage medium, and commuications system
WO2023108416A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
US20250280341A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system, and storage medium
US20250113368A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
US20250310056A1 (en) Cell activation method and communication apparatus
WO2025059859A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024178548A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatuses
WO2024243910A1 (en) Channel state adjustment method, and terminal device and network device
WO2025113251A1 (en) Cell handover method and communication apparatus